Mathura Mahatmya

Rupa goswami

Text 1

 

harir api bhajamänebhyaù

präyo muktim- dadäti na tu bhaktim

vihita-tad-unnati-satram-

mäthure dhanyam- nämämi tväm

harir-Hari; api-even; bhajamänebhyaù -worshiping; präyaù-for the most part; muktim-liberation; dadäti-gives; na-not; tu-but;û bhaktim-bhakti; vihita-placed; tad-unnati-satram-great sacrifice; mäthure-in Mathurä; dhanyam-auspicious; nämämi-obeisaëes; tväm-to you.

 

Generally Lord Hari gives mukti, but not bhakti, to his worshipers. O Mathurä, to you, who gives a great sacrifice of pure bhakti and who are very auspicious, I offer my respectful obeisances.

 

Text 2

 

dhanyänäà hådayänanda-

pradaà saìgåhyate mudä

mähätmyaà mathurä-puryäù

sarva-tértha-çiromaëeù

dhanyänäm-of the fortunate; hådayänanda-bliss to the hearts; pradam-giving; saìgåhyate-collected; mudä-happily; mähätmyam-glorificaion;mathurä-puryäù-of Mathurä; sarva-tértha-çiromaëeù-the crest jewel of all holy places.

 

This glorification of Mathurä-puré, which is the crest jewel of all holy places, has been very happily collected. It gives joy to the hearts of the fortunate.

 

Text 3

 

taträsyäù päpa-häritvam. ädi-värähe

viàçatiù yojanänäà tu

mathuräà mama maëòalam

yatra tatra naro snäto

mucyate sarva-pätakaiù

tatra-there; äsyäù-of that; päpa-häritvam-removal of sin; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; viàçatiù'twenty; yojanänäm-yojanas; tu-indeed; mathuräàMathurä; mama-My; maëòalam-circle; yatra-where; tatra-there; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; mucyate-is liberated; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins.

Mathura' Removes Sins

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

My abode of Mathura'-maëòala is 20 yojanas in circumferance. A person who stays there becomes free from all sins.

 

Text 4

 

pade pade tértha-phalaà

mathuräyä vasundhare

yatra tatra naro snäto

mucyate ghora-kilbiñaiù

pade pade-at every step; tértha-phalam-result of visiting holy places; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; vasundhare-O earth-goddess; yatra-where; tatra-there; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; mucyate-liberated; ghora-kilbiñaiù-from the most terrible sins.

 

With every step he takes in Mathura' he gets the result of going to all other holy places. O earth-goddess, any person who bathes in Mathurä becomes free from the most terrible sins.

 

Text 5

 

sarva-dharma-vihinänäà

puruñänäà durätmanäm

narakärti-harä devi

mathurä päpa-ghätiné

sarva-dharma-vihinänäm-devoid of religion; puruñänäm- of persons; durätmanäm-wicked; narakärti-harä-removing the sufferings of hell; devi-O goddess; mathurä-Mathurä; päpa-ghätiné-destroying sins.

 

O goddess, Mathura' rescues the irreligious from the sufferings of hell and removes their sins.

 

Text 6

 

kåtaghnaç ca suräpaç ca

cauro bhagna-vratas tathä

mathuräà präpya manujä

mucyate sarva-kilbiñaiù

kåtaghnaù-ungrateful; ca-and; suräpaù-drunkards; ca-and; cauraù-thief; bhagna-vrataù-broken vows; tathä-then; mathuräm-Mathurä; präpya-attaining; manujäù-persons; mucyate-liberated; sarva-kilbiñaiù-from all sins.

Ungrateful persons, drunkards, thieves, and they who have broken vows, become free from all sins when they enter Mathura'

 

Text 7-8

 

süryodare tamo naçyed

yathä vajra-bhayän nagäù

tarkñaà dåñövä yathä sarpä

meghä vata-hatä iva

tattva-jïänad yathä duhkhaà

siàhaà dåñövä yathä mågaù

tathä päpäni naçyanti

mathurä-darçanät kñaëät

süryodare-in the sunrise; tamaù-darkness; naçyed-destroyed; yathä-as; vajra-bhayän-from fear of the goad; nagäù-elephants; tarkñam-Garuòa; dåñövä-seeing; yathä-as; sarpäù-snakes;; meghäh-clouds; vata-hatä-broken by the wind; iva-like; tattva-jïänad-because of knowledge of the truth; yathä-as; duhkham-suffering; siàham-a lion; dåñövä-having seen; yathä-as; mågaù-deer; tathä-in that way; päpäni-sins; naçyanti-perish; mathurä-darçanät-from the sight of Mathurä; kñaëät-in a moment.

 

As darknress is destroyed by the rising of the sun, as elephants fear the goad, as snakes that have seen Garuòa, as clouds broken by the wind, as unhappiness destroyed by knowledge, and as deer that have seen a lion, so are sins destroyed by the sight of Mathurä.

 

Text 9

 

çraddhayä bhakti-yuktaç ca

gatvä madhupuréà naraù

brahmahäpi viçuddhyeta

kià punaù tö anya-pätaké

çraddhayä-with faith; bhakti-yuktaù-and devotion; ca-and; gatvä-going; madhupurém-to Mathurä; naraù-a person; brahmahä-killer of a brähmaëa; api-even; viçuddhyeta-is purified; kim- punaù-what to speak; tu-indeed; anya-pätaké-of other sins.

 

A person who with faith and devotion goes to Mathurä becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa, what to speak of other sins.

 

Text 10

 

mathurä-snäna-kämasyä gacchatas tu pade pade

niräçäni vrajanty asya

päpäny eva çarérataù

mathurä-snäna-kämasya-of a person who desires to bathe in Mathurä; gacchataù-going; tu-indeed; pade pade-at every step; niräçäni-giving up hope; vrajanti-go; asya-of him; päpäni-sins; eva-indeed; çarérataù-from the body.

 

For one who, desiring to bathe in Mathurä, goes there, at every step sins, giving up all hope, leave his body.

 

Text 11

 

anusaìgena gacchan hi

vänijyenäpi sevayä

mathurä-snäna-mätreëa

päpaà tyaktvä divaà vrajet

anusaìgena-contact; gacchan-going; hi-indeed; vänijyena-on business; api-even; sevayä-with service; mathurä-in Mathurä; snäna-mätreëa-only by bathing; päpam-sins; tyaktvä-abandoning; divam-to the spiritual world; vrajet-goes.

 

One who, going to Mathurä only on business, takes a bathe there becomes free from all sins and goes to the spiritual world.

 

Text 12

 

nämäni gåhëatäm asyäù

sadaiva tö amhasaù kñayaù

sadä kåta-yugaà cätra

sadä caivottaräyaëam

nämäni-names; gåhëatäm-taking; asyäù-of it; sadä-always; eva-indeed; tu-certainly; amhasaù'sins; kñayaù-destroyed; sadä-always; kåta-yugam-Satya-yuga; ca-and; atra-here; sadä-always; ca-and; eva-indeed; uttaräyaëam-Uttaräyaëa.

 

For one who always chants the name of Mathurä sins are always destroyed. For him it is always Satya-yuga. For him it is always the auspicious time of Uttaräyaëa.

 

Text 13

 

yaù çåëoti varärohe

mäthuraà mama maëòalam

anyenoccaritaà çaçvat

so 'pi päpaiù pramucyate

yaù-who; çåëoti-hears; varärohe-O beautiful girl; mäthuram-Mathurä; mama-My; maëòalam-circle; anyena-by another; uccaritam-spoken; çaçvat-always; saù api-he; päpaiù-from sins; pramucyate-free.

 

O beautiful one, he who hears from others about my Mathurä-maëòala is always free from sin.

 

Text 14

 

tri-rätram api ye tatra

vasanti manujä mune

teñäà punanti niyataà

spåñöaç caraëa-reëavaù

tri-rätram-three nights; api-even; ye-who; tatra-there; vasanti-reside; manujäh-people; mune'O sage; teñäm-of them; punanti-purify; niyatam-always; spåñöaù-touched; caraëa-of the feet; reëavaù-dust.

 

O sage, to touch of the dust of the feet of they who live for three nights there purifies one.

 

Text 15

 

pädme pätäla-khaëòe hara-gauré-samväde

kåñëa-kréòä-karaà sthänaà

mathuräyäs tataà bhuvi

puëyä madhupuré yatra

sarva-päpa-pranäçiné

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; hara-gauré-samväde-in the conversation between Çiva and Gauré; kåñëa-kréòä-karam- Kåñëa's pastimes;sthänam-place; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; tatam-manifest; bhuvi-on earth; puëyä-sacred; madhupuré-Mathurä; yatra-where; sarva-päpa-all sins;pranäçiné-destroying.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, in a conversation between Lord Çiva and Gauré, it is said:

On this earth the shore of the Yamunä is the place where Lord Kåñëa enjoys pastiumes. On that shore is sacred Mathura' puré, which destroys all sins.

 

Text 16

 

yathä tåëa-samühaà tu

jvälayanti sphuliìgikäùtathä mahänti päpäni

dahate mathurä-puré

yathä-as; tåëa-samüham-grass; tu-indeed; jvälayanti-burns; sphuliìgikäù-sparks; tathä-so; mahänti'great; päpäni-sins; dahate-burns; mathurä-puré-Mathurä.

 

As sparks set grass on fire, so does Mathurä-puré burn the greatest sins.

 

Text 17

 

skände käçé-khaëòe

hådyaà madhuvanaà präyo

yamunäyäs taöe mahat

ädyaà bhagavataù sthänaà

yat puëyaà hari-medhasaù

päpo 'pi jantus tat präpya

niñpäpo jäyate dhruvam

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; käçé-khaëòe-Kasi-khaëòa; hådyam-charming; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; präyaù-for the most part; yamunäyäù-of the Yamunä; taöe'on the shore; mahat-great; ädyam-transcendental; bhagavataù-of the Lord; sthänam-place; yat-which; puëyam-sacred; hari-medhasaù-fixed their hearts on Lord Hari» päpaù-sin; api-even; jantuù-person; tat-that; präpya-attaining; niñpäpaù-sinless; jäyate-born; dhruvam-indeed.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Käçé-khaëòa, it is said:

The charming forest of Madhuvana is situated on the shore of the Yamunä. Madhuvana is the original place of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is very sacred to they whose hearts are fixed on Lord Hari. A sinful man who goes there becomes at once free from all sins.

 

Text 18

 

atha puëya-pradatvaà yathä ädi-värähe

yat puëyam açvamedhena

yat puëyaà räjasüyataù

mathuräyäà tad äpnoti

tri-rätra-çayanäd yamé

atha-now; puëya-pradatvam-granting pious merit; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yat-which; puëyam-piety; açvamedhena-by an asvamedha-yajna; yat-which; puëyam-piety; räjasüyataù-from a rajasuya-yajna; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tad-that; äpnoti-attains; tri-rätra-for three nights; çayanäd-by resting; yamé-self-controlled.

 

Mathura' Grants Pious Merit

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The pious merit attained by performing an açvamedha-yajïa and the pious merit attained by performing a räjasüya-yajïa is at once attained by a self-controlled person who stays for three nights in Mathurä.

 

Text 19

 

viàçatir yojanänäà tu

mäthuraà mama maëòalam

pade pade 'çvamedhéyaà

puëyaà nätra vicaraëä

viàçatir yojanänäm-20 yojanas; tu-indeed; mäthuram- mama maëòalam-My circle of Mathurä; pade pade-at every step; açvamedhéyam-of an asvamedha-yajna; puëyam-piety; na-not; atra-here; vicaraëä-doubt.

 

My Mathura'-maëòala is 20 yojanas (160 miles, in size. With every step there one attains the piety of perfoming an açvamedha-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 20

 

snänena sarva-térthänäà

yat syät sukåta-saïcayaù

tato 'dhikataraà proktaà

mäthure sarva-maëòale

snänena-by bathing; sarva-térthänäm-of all holy places; yat-what; syät-is; sukåta-saïcayaù'piety; tataù-than that; adhikataram-greater; proktam-said; mäthure sarva-maëòale-in the circle of Mathurä.

 

In Mathurä-maëòala one attains piety greater than what is attained by bathing in all other holy places.

 

Text 21

 

caturëäm api vedänäà

puëyam adhyayanäc ca yat

tat puëyaà jäyate puàsäà

mathuräà vadatäà satäm

caturëäm api vedänäm-of the four Vedas; puëyam-piety; adhyayanät-from study; ca-and; yat'what; tat-that; puëyam-piety; jäyate-is born; puàsäm-of persons; mathuräm-Mathurä; vadatäm-saying; satäm-saints.

 

The same piety that is attained by studying the four Vedas is also attained by a saintly devotee who speak the word Mathurä.

 

Text 22

 

svodbhava-päpa-häritvam. yathä ädi-värähe

anyatra hi kåtaà päpaà

tértham äsädya naçyati

térthe tu yat kåtaà päpaà

vajra-lepo bhaved dhruvam

svodbhava-manifest in itself; päpa-sins; häritvam-removal; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anyatra-in any other place; hi-certainly; kåtam-performed; päpam-sin; tértham-holy place; äsädya-attaining; naçyati-perishes; térthe-in the holy place; tu-but; yat-what; kåtam-done; päpam-sin; vajra-of a thunderbolt; lepaù-the licking; bhaved-becomes; dhruvam-certainly.

 

Mathura' Removes the Sins Performed There

This is described in the Ädi-varäha Purana:

Sins performed in some other place become destroyed when they approach a holy place of pilgrimage. However, sins performed at a holy place of pilgrimage become like the licking of lightning bolt.

 

Text 23

 

mathuräyäà kåtaà päpaà

mathuräyäà vinaçyati

jïänato 'jïänato 'väpi

yat päpaà samupärjitam-

sukåtaà duñkåtaà väpi

mathuräyäà praëaçyati

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; kåtam-done; päpam-sins; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vinaçyati-perishs; jïänataù-of the wise; ajïänataù-of the ignorant; vä-or; api-and; yat-which; päpam-sins; samupärjitam-attained; sukåtam-pious; duñkåtam-impious; vä-or; api-and; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; praëaçyati-perishes.

 

Sins performed at Mathurä become destroyed at Mathurä. Whether one is wise, or ignorant, saintly or wicked, his sins become destroyed at Mathurä.

Text 24

 

yatra kåñëena saïcérëaà

kréòitaà ca yathä-sukham

cakräìkita-padä tena

sthäne brahmamaye çubhe

yatra-where; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; saïcérëam-filled; kréòitam-enjoyed pastimes; ca-and; yathä-sukham-according to happiness; cakra-with the cakra; aìkita-marked; padä-feet; tena-by Him; sthäne-place; brahmamaye-spiritual; çubhe-auspicious.

 

In this beautiful spiritual place Lord Kåñëa, whose feet are marked with a cakra, enjoyed transcendental pastimes to his heart's content.

 

Text 25

 

eñä divyä puré devi

nitya-kälaà su-gopitä

bhaktä tvaà mama siñyä ca

kathitä te vasundhare

eñä-this; divyä-transcendental; puré-city; devi-O goddess; nitya-kälam-eternally; su-gopitä-hidden; bhaktä-devotee; tvam-you; mama-My» siñyä-disciple; ca-and; kathitä-spoken; te-to you; vasundhare-O earth-goddess.

 

O goddess, this transcendental city is eternally hidden with great care. O earth-goddess, because you are My devotee and My disciple, it is now described to you.

 

Text 26

 

na mayä kathitaà devi

brahmaëaç ca mahätmanaù

rudrasya na mayä pürvaà

kathitaà ca vasundhare

mayä su-gopitaà hy etad

guhyäd guhyatamaà småtam

na-not; mayä-by Me; kathitam-described; devi-O goddess; brahmaëaù-Brahmä; ca-and; mahätmanaù'great soul; rudrasya-Çiva; na-not; mayä-by Me; pürvam-previously; kathitam-said; ca-and; vasundhare-O earth; mayä-by Me; su-gopitam-hidden; hi-indeed; etad-this; guhyäd guhyatamam- småtam-greatest secret.

O goddess, I have not described this to the brähmaëas and the great souls. I have not described it to Lord Çiva. O earth-goddess, it has been carefully hidden by Me because I consider it the most confidential of all secrets.

 

Text 27

 

anyatra daçabhir varñaiù

prärabdhaà bhujyate tu yat

kilbiñaà tan mahä-devi

mäthure daçabhir dinaiù

anyatra-in another place; daçabhir varñaiù-for 10 years; prärabdham-beginnings; bhujyate-experienced; tu-indeed; yat-what; kilbiñam-sin; tat-that; mahä-devi-O goddess; mäthure-in Mathurä; daçabhir dinaiù-in 10 days.

 

O goddess, sins that fester for 10 years in other places are destroyed in Mathurä in 10 days.

 

Text 28

 

atha sarva-térthädhikatvam. yatha ädi-värähe

na vidyate hi pätäle

näntarékñe na mänuñe

samaà tu mathuräyä hi

térthe mama vasundhare

atha-now; sarva-of all; tértha-holy places; adhikatvam-superiority; yatha-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; na-not; vidyate-is; hi-indeed; pätäle-in hell; na-not; antarékñe-in heaven; na-not; mänuñe-in the world of men; samam-equal; tu-certainly; mathuräyä-to Mathurä; hi-certainly; térthe-holy place; mama-My; vasundhare-O earth.

 

Mathurä Is the Best of All Sacred Places

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O earth-goddess, neither in hell, heaven,, nor in the world of humans, is there any sacred place equal to Mathurä.

 

Text 29

 

tatra dharaëé-praçnaù

naimiñaà puñkaraà caiva

puréà väräëaséà tathäetän hitvä mahä-bhäga

mathuräà kià praçaàsasi

tatra-there; dharaëé-of the earth; praçnaù-question; naimiñam-Naimiñäraëya; puñkaram-Puñkara; ca-and; eva-indeed; purém-city» väräëasém-Väräëasé; tathä-that; etän-these; hitvä-ignoring; mahä-bhäga-O auspicious Lord; mathuräm-Mathurä; kim-why?; praçaàsasi-You glorify.

 

The the Earth-goddess Asked:

There are Naimiñäraëya, Lake Puñkara, and the city of Väräëasé. O auspicious Lord, why do You ignore them and glorify Mathurä?

 

Text 30

 

çré-varähenoktam mathureti su-vikhyätam

asti kñetraà paraà mama

su-ramyä ca praçastä ca

janma-bhümiù priyä mama

çré-varähena-by Lord varäha; uktam-said; mathurä-Mathurä; iti-thus; su-vikhyätam-famous; asti'is; kñetram-place; param-transcendental; mama-My; su-ramyä-charming; ca-and; praçastä-glorious; ca-and; janma-bhümiù-birthplace; priyä-dear; mama-to me.

Lord Varäha said:

Mathura' is famous as my supreme abode. It is beautiful and glorious. It is the place where I took birth. It is very dear to Me.

 

Text 31

 

sarveñäà devi térthänäà

mathuräà paramäà mahät

kåñëena kréòitaà yatra

tä ca çuddhaà pade pade

sarveñäm-of all; devi-o goddess; térthänäm-holy place; mathuräm-Mathurä; paramäm-best; mahat-great; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; kréòitam-played; yatra-where; tac-which; ca-and;û çuddham-pure; pade pade-at every step.

 

O goddess, Mathura' is the greatest of all holy places. Kåñëa enjoys pastimes there. It purifies one at every step.

 

Text 32

 

cakräìkitaà hi tat sarvaà kåñëasyaiva padena tu

bäla-kréòana-rüpäëi

kåtäni saha gopakaiù

cakräìkitam-marked with the cakra; hi-indeed; tat-that; sarvam-all; kåñëasya-of Kåñëa; eva-indeed; padena-by the foot; tu-indeed; bäla-kréòana-rüpäëi-in childhood pastimes; kåtäni-done; saha'with; gopakaiù-the gopas.

 

It is completely covered with Kåñëa footprints. Kåñëa enjoys childhood pastimes there with the cowherd boys.

 

Text 33

 

yäni térthäni täny eva

sthapitäni majarñibhiù

etat te kathitaà säraà

mayä satyena suvrate

yäni-which; térthäni-holy place; täni-they; eva-indeed; sthapitäni-established; majarñibhiù-by great sages; etat-this; te-to you; kathitam-spoken; säram-essence; mayä-by Me; satyena'in truth; suvrate-O saintly girl.

 

The great sages have discovered the holy places places of Mathurä. O saintly one, I have thus truthfully described the essence of Mathura' to you.

 

Text 34

 

na térthaà mathuräyä hi

na devaù keçavät paraù

na-not; tértham-holy place; mathuräyäh-than Mathurä; hi-indeed; na-not; devaù-demigod; keçavät-than Kåñëa; paraù-greater.

 

No holy place is better than Mathurä, and no demigod is better than Lord Keçava.

 

Text 35

 

värähe

çåëu tattvena me bhümi

kathyamänam atho 'naghe

mathureti su-vikhyätä

yasmin kñetre priyä mama

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; çåëu-listen; tattvena-in truth; me-My; bhümi-O earth; kathyamänam-saying; athaù-then; anaghe-O sinless one; mathurä-Mathurä; iti-thus; su-vikhyätä-very famous; yasmin-in which; kñetre-place; priyä-beloved; mama-My.

 

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

O earth-goddess, please listen and I shall tell you the truth. O sinless one, Mathura' is very famous as the place where my beloved Rädha' stays.

 

Text 36

 

su-ramyä su-praçastä ca

janma-bhümir mama priye

bhaviñyati varärohe

dväpare saàsthite yuge

su-ramyä-beautiful; su-praçastä-glorious; ca-and; janma-bhümir-birthplace; mama-My; priye-O beloved; bhaviñyati-will be; varärohe-O beautiful girl; dväpare saàsthite yuge-in Dväpara-yuga.

 

O dear one, O beautiful one, delightful and famous Mathura' is the place where I will take birth in the Dväpara-yuga.

 

Text 37

 

yayäti-nåpa-vaàçe 'ham

utpatsyämi vasundhare

çatäni païca varñänäm

atra sthasyämi niçcayaù

yayäti-nåpa-vaàçe-in the dynasty of King Yayati; aham-I; utpatsyämi-will take birth; vasundhare-O earth» çatäni-hundreds; païca-five; varñänäm-years; atra-here; sthasyämi'I will stay; niçcayaù-certainly.

 

O earth-goddess, I will take birth in the dynasty of King Yayäti and I will stay here for 500 years.

 

Text 38

 

skände mathura-khaëòe närada-väkyam

çåëu dharmaà mahä-präjïa

yat tvaà påcchasi dharma-vit

gopyaà sapta-puréëäà tu

mäthura-maëòalaà småtaà

skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; närada-väkyam-Närada's statement; çåëu-please listen; dharmam-religion; mahä-präjïa-O intelligent one; yat-what; tvam-you; påcchasi-ask; dharma-vit-O knower of religion; gopyam-hidden; sapta-puréëäm-of the seven cities; tu-indeed; mäthura-maëòalam-Mathurä; småtam-is considered.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, Närada said:

O wise one, O knower of religion, please listen to the answer to the question you have asked. Mathura'-maëòala is known to be the most confidential of the seven holy cities.

 

Text 39

 

triàçad-varña-sahasräëi

triàçad-varña-çatäni ca

yat phalam bhärate varñe

tat phalaà mathuräà smaran

triàçad-varña-sahasräëi-thirty thousand years; triàçad-varña-çatäni-three thousand years; ca-and; yat phalam-the result; bhärate varñe-on earth; tat phalam-that result; mathuräm-Mathurä; smaran-remembering.

 

The pious result attained by three thousand years or thirty thousand years of endeavor on earth is attained by simply once remembering Mathurä.

 

Text 40

 

tathä hi ädi-värähe

mahä-mäghyaà prayäge ca

yat phalaà labhate naraù

tat phalaà labhate devi

mathuräyäà dine dine

tathä hi-furthermore; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mahä-mäghyam-on maha'-mägha; prayäge-at Prayäga; ca-and; yat phalam-the result; labhate-attains; naraù-a person; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; dine dine-any day.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The pious result one attains on the Maha'-mägha sacred day at Prayäga is attained on any day in Mathurä.

 

Text 41

 

kärttikyäà caiva yat puëyaà

puñkare tu vasundhare

tat phalaà labhate martyo mathuräyäà dine dine

kärttikyäm-during Kärttika; ca-and; eva-certainly; yat puëyam-the piety; puñkare-at Puñkara; tu-indeed; vasundhare-O earth; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; martyaù-a human; mathuräyäm-at Mathurä» dine dine-any day.

 

O earth-goddess, the pious result one attains during the month of Kärttika at Puñkara Lake is attained on any day in Mathurä.

 

Text 42

 

väräëasyäà tu yat puëyaà

rähu-graste diväkare

tat phalaà labhate devi

mathuräyäà jitendriyaù

väräëasyäm-at varanasi; tu-indeed; yat puëyam-the piety; rähu-graste diväkare-during a solar eclipse; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-at Mathurä» jitendriyaù-a person who controls his senses.

 

O goddess, the pious reult one attains on a solar eclipse in Väräëasé is attained in Mathura' by a person who controls his senses.

 

Text 43

 

pürëe varñe sahasre tu

väräëasyäà tu yat phalam

tat phalaà labhate devi

mathuräyäà kñaëena hi

pürëe varñe sahasre-after a thousand years; tu-indeed; väräëasyäm-at Väräëasé; tu-indeed; yat phalam'that result; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-at Mathurä» kñaëena-in a moment; hi-indeed.

 

O goddess, the pious result one attains at Väräëasé after a thousand years in attained at Mathura' in a single moment.

 

Text 44

 

pädme pätäla-khaëòe

pürëe varña-sahasre tu

tértha-räjeñu yat phalam

tat phalaà labhate devi

mathuräyäà dine dine

pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khand; pürëe varña-sahasre-after a thousand years; tu-indeed; tértha-räjeñu'at the kings of holy places; yat phalam tat phalam-the same result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; dine dine-any day.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

O goddess, the same pious result one attains at Prayäga, the king of holy places, by staying there for a thousand years is attained every day at Mathurä.

 

Text 45

 

godävaré-dvädaçako naro yaù

kñetre kurüëäà kñiti-däyako yaù

ñaë-mäsakän sädhayate gayäyäà

samaà bhaven no dinam ekaà mäthure

godävaré-by the Godävaré; dvädaçakaù-twelve; naro yaù-a person who; kñetre kurüëäm-at Kurukñetra; kñiti-däyakaù-giving land; yaù-who; ñan„-mäsakän-for siø months; sädhayate-staying; gayäyäm-at gayä; samam-equal; bhavet-not; naù-not» dinam-day; ekam-one; mäthure-in Mathurä.

 

A person who lives for twelve months on the shore of the Godävaré, who gives a gift of land at Kurukñetra, or who lives for siø months at Gayä, is not equal to a person who lives for a single day at Mathurä.

 

Text 46

 

na dvärakä käçé käïcé na mäyä

gadäbhåto yasya samaà na tértham

santarpitä yad yamunä-jalena

väïchanti no pitaraù piëòa-dänam

na-not; dvärakä-Dvaraka; käçé-Väräëasé; käïcé-Kanci; na-not; mäyä-Maya; gadäbhåtaù-of Lord Kåñëa; yasya-of whom; samam-equal; na-not; tértham-holy place; santarpitä-satisfied; yad-which; yamunä-of the yamunä; jalena-with water;û väïchanti-desire; naù-not; pitaraù-the pitäs; piëòa-dänam-piëòa.

 

Neither Dvärakä, Käçé, Kaïcé, nor Mäya' are equal to Lord Kåñëa's place of Mathurä. Pleased by the offering of Yamuna' water there, the pitäs do not desire offerings of piëòa.

 

Text 47

 

ata evottara-khaëòe

mathuräyäà prakurvanté puré-sädhäraëé-dåçäm

ye naräs te 'pi vijïeyäù

päpa-räçibhir anvitäù

ataù eva-therefore; uttara-khaëòe-in the Uttara-khaëòa; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; prakurvanti-do; puré-sädhäraëé-an ordinary city;dåçäm-seeing; ye-which; naräù-people; te api-they; vijïeyäù-known; päpa-räçibhir-with sins; anvitäù-filled.

 

In the Uttara-khaëòa it is said:

They who think that Mathurä is an ordinary city are known to be filled with great sins.

 

Text 48

 

çré-kåñëäkhyaà paraà brahma

yatra kréòati sarvadä

tad-anyäkhila-térthebhyo

'dhikaà yat tat kim ucyate

çré-kåñëäkhyam-named Lord Kåñëa; param- brahma-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; yatra-where; kréòati-enjoys pastimes; sarvadä-eternally; tad-anyäkhila-térthebhyaù-than all other holy places; adhikam-greater; yat tat-that; kim ucyate-what more need be said?

 

The the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, enjoys pastimes there eternally. For this reason it is better than all other holy places. What more need be said?

 

Text 49

 

nirväëa-khaëòe ca

taà puréà präpya mathuräà

madéyäà sura-durlabhäm

khaïo bhütvändhako väpi

präëän eva parityajet

nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvaana-khaëòa; ca-also; tam- purém-that city; präpya-attaining; mathuräm-Mathura'; madéyäm-My; sura-durlabhäm-difficult for the demigods to attain; khaïaù-a cripple; bhütvä-becoming; andhakaù-a blind man; vä-or; api-even; präëän-life; eva-indeed; parityajet-leaving.

 

In the Nirväëa-khaëòa it is said:

A blind man or a cripple who dies in my city of Mathurä, which even the demigods cannot attain, will attain My eternal abode.

 

Text 50

 

pätäla-khaëòe ca

na dåñöä mathurä yena

didåkñä yasya jäyate

yatra tatra måtasyäpi

mäthure janma jäyate

pätäla-khaëòe-in the Patala-khaëòa; ca-and; na-not; dåñöä-seen; mathurä-Mathurä; yena-by whom; didåkñä-desiring to see; yasya-of whom; jäyate'is born; yatra-where; tatra-there; måtasya-dead; api-even; mäthure-in Mathurä; janma-birth; jäyate-is born.

 

In the Pätäla-khaëòa Puräëa it is also said:

He who deos not see Mathurä, although he yearns to see it, will take birth after his death in Mathurä.

 

Text 51

 

asaìkhya-térthäçrayatvam. yathä ädi-värähe

ñañöi-koöi-sahasräëi

ñañti-koöi-çatäni ca

tértha-saìkhyä tu vasudhe

mathuräyäà mayoditä

asaìkhya-numberless; tértha-of holy places; äçrayatvam-the condition of being the shelter; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; ñañöi-koöi-sahasräëi ñañti-koöi-çatäni ca-60 billion; tértha-saìkhyä-holy place; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; mayä-by Me; uditä-manifest.

 

Mathura' Is the Shelter of Numberless Holy Places

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O earth-goddess, 60 billion sacred places reside in My Mathurä.

 

Text 52

 

skände mathura-khaëòe

bhüme rajäàsi gaëanä

kälenäpi bhaven nåpa

mäthure yäni térthäni

teñäà saìkhyä na vartate

skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; bhüme-O earth; rajäàsi-dust; gaëanä-counting; kälena-in time; api-even; bhavet-may be; nåpa-O king; mäthure-in Mathurä; yäni-which; térthäni-holy places; teñäm-of them; saìkhyä-counting;û na-not; vartate-is.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

O king, in the course of time it may be possible to count the grains of dust on the earth, but it will not be possible to count the number of holy places in Mathurä.

 

Text 53

 

atha niväsopadeçaù. pädme pätäla-khaëòe

kuru bhoù kuru bho väsaà

mathuräyäù puréà prati

yatra gopyaç ca govindas

trailokyasya prakäçakaù

atha-now; niväsa-residence; upadeçaù-instruction; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; kuru-do; bhoù-Oh; kuru-do; bhaù-Oh; väsam-residence; mathuräyäù purém- prati-in Mathurä; yatra-where; gopyaù-the gopis; ca-and; govindaùKåñëa; trailokyasya-of the three worlds; prakäçakaù-creator.

 

Instruction to Reside in Mathurä

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-kanda, it is said»

Reside in Mathurä! Reside in Mathurä, where the gopés, and Lord Govinda, who created the three worlds, live.

 

Text 54

 

re re saàsära-magnädya

sikñäm ekäà tu me çåëu

yadécchasi sukhaà sändraà

väsaà kuru madhoù pure

re-Oh; re-Oh; saàsära-in birth and death;magna-plunged; adya-today; sikñäm-instruction; ekäm-one; tu-indeed; me-from Me; çåëu-please hear; yadi-if; icchasi-you desire; sukham-happiness; sändram-intense; väsam-residence; kuru-do; madhoù pure-in Mathurä.

O people plunged in the ocean of birth and death, please hear this one teaching: if you desire intense bliss, then please reside in Mathura'.

 

Text 55

 

yadéccheù pära-saàsäraà

vahitraà mäthuraà kuru

nauko sa prerakaù kåñëo

bhoù çive pära-kärakaù

yadi-if; iccheù-you desire; pära-the other shore; saàsäram-birth and death; vahitram-boat; mäthuram-Mathurä; kuru-make; naukaù-a boat; sah-He; prerakaù-captain; kåñëaù-Kåñëa; bhoù-Oh; çive-O Gauré; pära-kärakaù-taking to the other shore.

 

O Gauré, if you desire to cross the ocean of repeated birth and death, then reside in Mathurä. Mathura' is a strong boat, and Kåñëa, the captain of this strong boat, will lead you to the other shore.

 

Text 56

 

aho loko mahän andho

netra-yukto na paçyati

mäthure vidyamäne 'pi

saàsåtià bhajate sadä

ahaù-Oh; lokaù-world; mahän-great; andhaù-blind; netra-yuktaù-with eyes; na-do not; paçyati'see; mäthure-in Mathurä; vidyamäne-being; api-even; saàsåtim-to birth and death» bhajate-attached; sadä-always.

 

The people of this world, although they have eyes, are blind and cannot see. Although Mathurä is manifest in this world, they remain attached to this world of repeated birth and death.

 

Text 57

 

mänuñéà yonim atuläà

labdhvä bhägyasya yogataù

våthaiväyur gataà teñäà

na dåñövä mathuräà purém

mänuñém-human; yonim-birth; atuläm-rare; labdhvä-having attained; bhägyasya yogataù-possessing; våthä-useless; eva-indeed; äyur-life; gatam-gone; teñäm-of them; na-not; dåñövä-having seen; mathuräm- purém-Mathurä.

 

If, after attaining this rare and valuable human form of life, one does not see Mathurä, then he wastes his life.

Text 58

 

aho mateù sudaurbalyam

aho bhägyasya daurvidham

aho mohasya mahimä

mathurä naiva sevyate

ahaù-Oh; mateù-of intelligence; sudaurbalyam-great weakness; ahaù-Oh; bhägyasya-of good-fortune; daurvidham-collapse; ahaù-Oh; mohasya-of illusion; mahimä-glory; mathurä-Mathurä; na-not; eva-indeed; sevyate-is served.

 

O what foolishness! What misfortune! What illusion when Mathurä is not served.

 

Text 59

 

säpadaà sampadaà jïätvä

säpäyaà käyaà uccakaiù

capaläà caïcaläà caiva

dåñövä mat-puram äçrayet

sa-with; äpadam-calamity; sampadam-prosperity; jïätvä-knowing; sa-äpäyam-with death; käyam-the body; uccakaiù-very; capaläm-fickle; caïcaläm-the goddess of fortune; ca-and; eva-indeed; dåñövä-having seen; mat-puram'My city; äçrayet-should take shelter.

 

Knowing that prosperity contains calamity within it, and knowing that this body contains death within it, and seeing that the goddess of fortune is fickle, one should take shelter of My city of Mathurä.

 

Texts 60-62

 

skände mathura-khaëòe

tatraiva bhavatäà bandhuù

päëòavänäà suhåt sakhä

sätvatänäà priyaù säkñäd

yädavänäà kuleçvaraù

kåñëaù kamala-paträkñaù

so 'vatérëo yudhiñöhira

rämeëa saha devakyäà

vasudeva-gåhottame

tasya karmäny anekäni

parigétäni süribhiù

jätäni mäthure deçe täà puréà ko na sevate

skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; bhavatäm-of you; bandhuù-friend; päëòavänäm-of the Pandavas; suhåt sakhä-friend; sätvatänäm-of the Satvatas; priyaù-dear; säkñäd-directly; yädavänäm-of the Yadavas; kuleçvaraù-leader of the family; kåñëaù-Kåñëa; kamala-paträkñaù-lotus-eyed; saù-He; avatérëaù-descended; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhisthira; rämeëa-with Balaräma; saha-with; devakyäm-in the womâ of Devaké; vasudeva-gåha-uttame-in Vasudeva's house; tasya-of Him; karmäni-deeds; anekäni-many; parigétäni-glorified; süribhiù-by the devotees; jätäni-born; mäthure deçe-in Mathurä; täm- purém-this city; kaù-who?; na-not; sevate-serves.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

O Yudhiñöhira, who will not serve this city of Mathurä, where lotus-eyed Kåñëa, who appeared with Balaräma in the womâ of Devaké in the palace of Vasudeva, and whose activities are glorified by the demigods, and who is the friend of all you Päëòavas, and who is dear to all the Sätvatas, and who is the king of all the Yadus, decsended?

 

Text 63

 

ata evädi-värähe

mathuräà ca parityajya

yo 'nyatra kurute ratim

müòho bhramati saàsäre

mohito mama mäyayä

ataù eva-therefore; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and; parityajya-abandoning; yaù-who; anyatra-in another place; kurute-does; ratim-attraction; müòhaù-bewildered; bhramati-wanders; saàsäre-in birth and death; mohitaù-bewildered; mama-My; mäyayä-by the maya.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa is is said:

One who leaves Mathurä and is happy in to stay in some other place is a fool who, bewildered by My mäyä, wanders in this world of birth and death.

 

Text 64

 

skände mathura-khaëòe

mathuräà ca parityajya

yo 'nyatra kurute spåhäm

durbuddhes tasya kià jïänam

ajïänena vimohitaù

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathura-khaëòe-Mathura'-khaëòa; mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and; parityajya-leaving; yaù-who; anyatra-some other place; kurute-does; spåhäm-desire; durbuddheù-fool; tasya-of him; kim-what?; jïänam-knowledge; ajïänena-by ignorance; vimohitaù-bewildered.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

He who, although having attained Mathurä, desires to go somewhere else, is bewildered. What knowledge does he have? He is bewildered by ignorance.

 

Text 65

 

athägati-gatitvam. ädi-värähe

mäträ piträ parityaktä

ye tyaktä nija-bandhubhiù

yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi

teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

atha-now; agati-of they who have no shelter; gatitvam-the state of being the shelter; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mäträ-by mother; piträ-and father;û parityaktäh-abandoned; ye-who; tyaktä-abandoned; nija-bandhubhiù-by their own relatives; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere; gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

 

Mathurä Is the Shelter of the Shelterless

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

For they who are abandoned by mother, father, friends and relatives, and who have no shelter, Mathurä is a shelter.

 

 

Text 66

 

päpa-räçibhir äkräntä

ye däridrya-paräjitäù

yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi

teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

päpa-of sins; räçibhir-by hosts; äkräntäh-overpowered; ye-who; däridrya-by poverty; paräjitäù-defeated; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

 

For they who are overpowered by a host of sins, and who are defeated by poverty and who have no shelter, Mathura' is a shelter.

 

 

Text 67

 

ye ca yoga-paribhrañöä

ye tapo-däna-varjitäù

yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi

teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

ye-who; ca-and; yoga-paribhrañöä-fallen from yoga; ye-who; tapaù-austerity; däna-and charity; varjitäù-without; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

For they who have fallen from the path of yoga, who have neither austerity nor charity, and who have no shelter, Mathura' is a shelter.

 

Text 68

 

çruti-småti-vihénä ye

çaucäcära-vivarjitäù

yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi

teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

çruti-småti-vihénä ye-who; çauca-äcära-vivarjitäù-without cleanliness; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

For they who have no knowledge of çruti or småti, who have no purity, and have no shelter, Mathurä is a shelter.

 

Text 69

 

särät särataraà sthänaà

guhyänäà guhyam uttamam

gatim anveñamänänäà

mäthure paramä gatiù

särät-than the best; särataram-better; sthänam-place; guhyänäm-of secrets; guhyam-secret; uttamam-ultimate; gatim-destination; anvesamänänäm-of they who seek; mäthure-in Mathurä; paramä'supreme; gatiù-shelter.

 

The ultimate, the supereme secret of all secrets, the goal for they who seek it, Mathura' is the supreme shelter.

 

Text 70

 

pade pade samäkräntä

ye vipadbhir ahar-niçam

yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi

teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

pade pade-at every step; samäkräntäh-defeated; ye-who; vipadbhir-by calamities; ahar-niçam-day and night; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

For they who, at every step, day and night, are defeated by a host of calamities, and who have no shelter, Mathura' is a shelter.

 

Text 71

 

atha nitya-hari-sannidhänatvam.

ädi-värähe mathuräyäù paraà kñetraà

trailokye näpi vartate

yasmäd vasämy ahaà devi

mathuräyäà tu sarvadä

atha-now; nitya-eternally; hari-of Lord Kåñëa; sannidhänatvam-nearness; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; param-supreme; kñetram-place; trailokye-in the three worlds; na-not; api-even; vartate-is; yasmäd-because; vasämi-reside; aham-I; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; sarvadä-eternally.

 

Lord Hari Stays Eternally In Mathurä

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O goddess, because no place in the three worlds is superior to Mathurä, I eternally stay in Mathurä.

 

Text 72

 

aho 'ti-dhanyä mathurä

yatra sannihito hariù

sarveñäà yatra päpänäà

praveço na hi vidyate

ahaù-Oh; ati-dhanyä-supremely opulent; mathurä-Mathurä; yatra-where; sannihitaù-stays; hariù'Kåñëa; sarveñäm-of all; yatra-where; päpänäm-sins; praveçaù-entance; na-not; hi-indeed; vidyate-is.

 

Mathurä, where Lord Hari stayed, and where no sin can enter, is supremely opulent

 

Text 73

 

pädme pätäla-khaëòe

aho madhu-puré dhanyä

yatra tiñöhati kaàsahä

tatra deva-muniù sarvo

väsam icchati sarvadä

pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; madhu-puré-Mathurä; dhanyä-opulent; yatra-where; tiñöhati'stays; kaàsahä-Kåñëa; tatra-there; deva-demigods; muniù-sages; sarvaù-all; väsam-residence; icchati'desire; sarvadä-eternally.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

In opulent Mathurä, where Lord Kåñëa stays, all the demigods and sages aspire to live eternally.

 

Text 74

 

çré-bhägavate prathamä-skände

aho alaà çläghyatamaà yadoù kulaà

aho alaà çläghyatamaà madhor vanam

yad eña puàsäm åñabhaù priyaù çréyaù

sva-janmanä caìkramanena caïcati

çré-bhägavate prathamä-skände-in Srimad-Bhagavatam, Canto One; ahaù-oh; alam-greatly; çläghyatamam-glorified; yadoù-of King Yadu; kulam-the dynasty; ahaù-oh; alam-greatly; çläghyatamam-glorified; madhor vanam-Mathurä; yad-which; eñah-He; puàsäm-of living beings; åñabhaù'the supreme leader; priyaù-the husband; çréyaù-of the goddess of fortune; sva-janmanä-by His birth; caìkramanena caïcati-wandered.

 

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.10.26 it is said:

Oh, how supremely glorified is the dynasty of King Yadu, and how virtuous is the land of Mathurä, where the supreme leader all living beings, the husband of the goddess of fortune, has taken His birth and wandered in His childhood.*

 

Text 75

 

caturtha-skände

tat täta gaccha bhadraà te

yamunäyäs taöaà çucim

puëyaà madhuvanaà yatra

sännidhyaà nityadä hareù

caturtha-skände-in the Fourth Canto; tat-that; täta-my dear son; gaccha-go; bhadraàgood fortune; te-for you; yamunäyäù-of the Yamunä; taöam-bank; çucim-being purified; puëyam-the holy; madhuvanam-of the name Madhuvana; yatra-where; sännidhyaàbeing nearer; nityadä-always; hareù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

 

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam 4.8.42 it is said:

My dear boy, I therefore wish all good fortune to you. You should go to the bank of the Yamunä, where there is a virtuous forest named Madhuvana, and there be purified. Just by going there one draws nearer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who always lives there.*

 

Text 76

 

çré-daçame

räjadhäné tataù säbhüt

sarva-yädava-bhü-bhujäm

mathurä bhagavän yatra

nityaà sannihito hariù

çré-daçame-in the Tenth Canto; räjadhäné-the capitol; tataù-from that time; sä-the country and the city known as Mathurä; abhüt-became; sarva-yädava-bhü-bhujäm-of all the kings who appeared in the Yadu dynasty; mathurä-the place known as Mathurä; bhagavän-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; yatra-wherein; nityam-eternally; sannihitaù-intimately connected, living eternally; hariù-the Lord, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

 

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.1.28 it is said:

Since that time, the city of Mathura' had been the capitol of all the kings of the Yadu dynasty. The city and district of Mathura' are very intimately connected with Kåñëa, for Lord Kåñëa lives there eternally.*

Text 77

 

çré-viñëu-puräëe prathame 'àçe

hatvä ca lavaëaà rakño-

madhu-putraà mahä-balam

çatrughno mathuräà näma

puréà tatra cakära vai

çré-viñëu-puräëe-in Viñëu Puräëa; prathame aàçe-First Canto; hatvä-having killed; ca-and; lavaëam-Lavaëa; rakño madhu-putram-the son of the demon Madhu; mahä-balam-powerful; çatrughnaù-Çatrughna; mathuräm-Mathurä;û näma-named; purém-city; tatra-there; cakära-did; vai-indeed.

 

In the Viñëu Puräëa, First Canto, it is said:

This city is named Mathura' because Çatrughna here killed powerful Lavaëäsura, the son of the rakñasa Madhu.

 

Text 78

 

yatra vai deva-devasya

sännidhyaà hari-medhasaù

sarva-päpa-hare tasmiàs

tapas térthe cakära saù

yatra-where; vai-indeed; deva-devasya-the master of the demigods; sännidhyam-nearness; hari-medhasaù-they who have fixed their hearts on Lord Hari; sarva-päpa-all sins;hare-removing; tasmin-there; tapaù-austerities; térthe'at the holy place; cakära-did; saù-he.

 

He (Dhruva Mahäräja, performed austerities at this holy place, where all sins are destroyed, and where the the Supreme Personality of Godhead, on whom the devotees fiø their hearts, always stays.

 

Text 79

 

väyu-puräëe catvariàçad yojanänäà

tatas tu mathurä småtä

yatra devo hariù säkñät

svayaà tiñöhati sarvadä

väyu-puräëe-in the Vayu Puräëa; catvariàçad-40; yojanänäm-yojanas; tataù-then; tu-indeed; mathurä-Mathurä; småtäù-remembered; yatra-where; devaù-Lord; hariù-Kåñëa; säkñät-directly; svayam-personally; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-eternally.

In the Väyu Puräëa it is said:

In Mathurä, which is 40 yojanas (320 miles, in measurement, Lord Hari stays eternally.

 

Text 80

 

atha çré-bhagavat-kåpä-labhyatvam. ädi-värähe

na tat-puëyair na taj-jïänair

na tapobhir na taj-japaiù

na labhyaà vividhair yajïair

labhyaà mad-anubhävataù

atha-now; çré-bhagavat-of the Lord; kåpä-of the mercy; labhyatvam-attainment; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; na-not; tat-puëyair-with piety; na-not; taê-jïänair-by knowledge; na-not; tapobhir-by austerities; na-not; taê-japaiù-by japa» na-not; labhyam-attainable; vividhair-by various; yajïair-sacrifices; labhyam-attainable; mad-anubhävataù-by My mercy.

 

In Mathura' One May Attain the Mercy of the the Supreme Personality of Godhead

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Not by great expertise, not by transcendental knowledge, not by austerities, not by chanting mantras and not by performing many yajïas, but only by my mercy is Mathurä attained.

 

Text 81

 

çré-viñëoù kåpayä nünaà

tatra väso bhaviñyati

vinä viñëoù prasädena

kñaëam ekaà na tiñöhati

çré-viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; kåpayä-by the mercy; nünam-indeed; tatra-there; väsaù-residence; bhaviñyati-will be; vinä-without; viñëoù-of Viñëu; prasädena-by the mercy; kñaëam-moment; ekam-one; na-not; tiñöhati-stays.

 

By the mercy of Çré Viñëu one attains residence in Mathura'. Without Viñëu's mercy one cannot stay for even ñ moment in Mathurä.

 

Text 82

 

pädme uttara-khaëòe

harau yeñäà sthirä bhaktir

bhüyasé yeñu tat-kåpä

teñäm eva hi dhanyänäà

mathuräyäà bhaved ratiù

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; uttara-khaëòe-Uttara-khaëòa; harau-to Lord Hari; yeñäm-of whom; sthirä-steady; bhaktir-devotion; bhüyasé-great; yeñu'in whom; tat-kåpä-His mercy; teñäm-of them; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; dhanyänäm-fortunate; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; bhaved'is; ratiù-pleasure.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

The fortunate souls who have firm devotion for Lord Hari, and who have attained His great mercy, take pleasure in Mathurä.

 

Text 83

 

atha bhagavad-dhyänädi-labhyatvam. ädi-värähe

yadä viçuddhas tapa-ädinä janäù

çubhäçrayä dhyäna-dhana nirantaram

tadaiva paçyanti mamottamäà puréà

na canyathä kalpa-çatair dvijottama

atha-now; bhagavad-on the Lord; dhyäna-meditation; ädi-beginning with; labhyatvam-attainable; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yadä'when; viçuddhaù-pure; tapah-austerity; ädinä-beginning with; janäù-people; çubha-pure; çrayäh-hearts; dhyäna-dhana-wealthy with meditation; nirantaram-always; tadä-then; eva-indeed; paçyanti-see; mama-My; uttamäm-supreme; purém-city; na-not; ca-and; anyathä-otherwise; kalpa-çatair-with hundreds of kalpas; dvijottama-O best of the dvijas.

 

Mathura' Can Be Attained By One Who Meditates on the Supreme Personality of Godhead

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is saidL:

O best of the brähmaëas, living entities who are purified by austerity and other spiritual practices, who hearts are filled with auspicious things, and who are fixed in constant meditation on Me, are able to see my supreme city of Mathura'. Others cannot see it in millions of kalpas.

 

Text 84

 

mokña-pradatvam. ädi-värähe

yä gatir yoga-yuktasya

brahmajïasya manéñinaù

sä gatis tyajataù präëän

mathuräyäà narasya ca

mokña-liberation; pradatvam-granting; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yä-which; gatir-destination; yoga-yuktasya-of one engaged in yoga; brahmajïasya-who knows brahman; manéñinaù-wise; sä-that; gatiù-destination; tyajataù-giving up; präëän-life; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; narasya-of a person; ca-and.

 

Mathurä Grants Liberation

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The spiritual desintation attained by one who practices yoga, one who knows Brahman, or one who is a thoughtful philosospher, is also attained by a person who passes from this life in Mathurä.

 

Text 85

 

térthe caiva gåhe väpi

catvare pathi caiva hi

yatra tatra måtä devi

muktià yänti na cänyathä

térthe-at this holy place; ca-and; eva-indeed; gåhe-at home; vä-or; api-and; catvare-in a courtyard; pathi-on the road; ca-and; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; yatra-where; tatra-there; måtäù-after death; devi-O goddess; muktim-liberation; yänti-attain; na-not; ca-and; anyathä-otherwise.

 

O goddess, they who die in this holy place in a home here, in a courtyard, or on the road, attain liberation without any doubt.

 

Text 86

 

käçy-ädi-puryo yadi santi loke

täsäà tu madhye mathuraiva dhanyä

yä janma-mauïjé-vrata-måtyu-dähair

nåëäà caturdhä vidadhäti mokñam

käçy-ädi-puryaù-beginning with Väräëasé; yadi-if; santi-are; loke-in the world; täsäm-of them; tu-indeed; madhye-in the midst; mathurä-Mathurä; eva-indeed; dhanyä-opulent; yä-which; janma-birth; mauïjé-vrata-brahminical initiation; måtyu-of death; dähair-by the fires; nåëäm-of people; caturdhä-in four» vidadhäti-grants; mokñam-liberation.

 

If Väräëasé and other holy cities were assemnbled together on this earth Mathurä would be the greatest and most opulent amongst them. With the fires of birth, death, or brahmnical initiation within its boundaries, Mathura' grants the four kinds of liberation.

 

Text 87

 

na yogair yä gatir labhyä

manvantara-çatair api

anyatra helayä sätra

labhayte mat-prasädataù

na-not; yogair-by yoga; yä-which; gatir-destination; labhyä-is attained; manvantara-çatair-in hundreds of Manvantaras; api-even; anyatra-in another place; helayä-easily; sä-that; atra-here; labhayte-is attained; mat-prasädataù-by My mercy.

 

The spiritual destination that in another place cannot be attained byt practicieng yoga for thousands of manvantaras is attainable by My mercy very easily in this place.

 

Text 88

 

na päpebhyo bhayaà yatra

na bhayaà yatra vai yamät

na garbha-väsa-bhér yatra

tat kñetraà ko na saàçrayet

na-not; päpebhyaù-of sins; bhayam-fear; yatra-where; na-not; bhayam-fear; yatra-where; vai'indeed; yamät-of yama; na-not; garbha-väsa-of residence in a mother's womb; bhér-fear; yatra-where; tat kñetram-that place; kaù-who?; na-not; saàçrayet-will take shelter.

 

Who will not take shelter of this holy place where there is no fear of sin, no fear of Yamaräja, and no fear of residing again in a mother's womb.

 

Text 89

 

vinä saìkhyena yogena

vinä svätma-vicintanam

vinä vrata-tapo-dänaiù

çreyo vai präëinäm iha

vinä-without; saìkhyena-sankhya; yogena-yoga; vinä-without; svätma-vicintanam-meditation on the Self; vinä-without; vrata-vows; tapaù-austerities; dänaiù-and charity; çreyaù-benediction; vai-indeed; präëinäm-of the,living entities; iha-here.

 

Withyout saìkhya, without yoga, without meditation on the Self, and without vows, austerities or charity, the living entities here attain the greatest benediction.

 

Text 90

 

kåmi-kéöa-pataìgädya

mathuräyäà måta hi ye

külät patanti ye våkñäs

te 'pi yänti paräà gatim

kåmi-worms; kéöa-insects; pataìga-birds; ädya-beginning with; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; måta hi-indeed; ye-who; külät-from the riverbanks; patanti'fall; ye-who; våkñäùtrees; te-they; api-even; yänti-attain; paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.

 

The worms, insects, birds, and other creatures who die here and the trees that fall down from the riverbanks here, all attain the supreme destination.

 

Text 91

 

värähe

viàça-yojana-vistäro

mathuräyäç ca maëòalam

yatra präëän vimuïcanti

siddhä yänti paräà gatim

värähe-in the varäha Puräëa; viàça-yojana-vistäraù-20 yojanas in size; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; ca-and; maëòalam'circle; yatra-where; präëän-life; vimuïcanti-abandon; siddhäh-perfect; yänti-attain; paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.

 

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

They who die in the twenty-yojana (160 miles, area of Mathura' become perfect and attain the supreme destination.

 

Text 92

 

pädme pätäla-khaëòe

caëòäla-jaòa-mükänäà

jéva-hiàsä-ratasya ca

mathurä-piëòa-dänena

punar janma na vidyate

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; caëòäla-outcaste; jaòa-fool; mükänäm-deaf-mute; jéva-hiàsä-ratasya-sadist; ca-and; mathurä-in Mathurä; piëòa-dänena-by offering piëòa; punar-again; janma-birth; na-not; vidyate-is.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

There is no next birth for an outcaste, a fool, a deaf-mute, or a sadist, that offers piëòa in Mathurä.

 

Text 93

 

praëälyäm iñöa-khacite

çmaçäne vyomni maïcake

aööäle vä måto devi

mäthure muktim äpnuyuù

praëälyäm-in a ditch; iñöa-khacite-ina brick-house; çmaçäne-at a crematorium; vyomni-in the sky; maïcake'on a throne; aööäle-in a palace; vä-or; måtaù-dying; devi-O goddess; mäthure-in Mathurä; muktim-liberation; äpnuyuù-attain.

 

Dying in Mathurä, whether in a ditch, in a brick-house, at a crematorium, in the sky, on a throne, or in a palace, one attains liberation.

 

Text 94-95

 

vämana-puräëe

mathurä-tértham atulaà

viçrutaà loka-sat-kåtam

yatra kåñëas tu gopälaiù

samaà kréòitavan jale

tatra gatvä naro brahman

mucyate sarva-pätakaiù

tri-rätram uñitas tatra

nirähäro jitendriyaù

viharantaà jale kåñëaà

dhyäyan mukto bhaven naraù

vämana-puräëe-in the Vämana Puräëa; mathurä-tértham-Mathurä; atulam-peerless; viçrutam-famous; loka-sat-kåtam-honored in the world; yatra-where; kåñëaù-Kåñëa; tu-indeed; gopälaiù-the gopas; samam-with; kréòitavan-played; jale-in the water; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; brahman-O brähmaëa; mucyate-is freed; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins; tri-rätram-for three nights; uñitaù-residing; tatra-there; nirähäraù-fasting; jitendriyaù-controlling the senses; viharantam-playing; jale-in the water; kåñëam-on Lord Kåñëa; dhyäyan-meditating; muktaù-liberated; bhavet-becomes; naraù-a person.

 

In the Vämana Puräëa it is said:

A person who goes to peerless, famous, honored-in-all-the-worlds Mathurä-tértha, where Kåñëa played in the water with the gopas, becomes free from all sins, O brähmaëa. A person who, fasting, controlling his senses, and meditating on Kåñëa playing in the water, stays there for three nights, becomes liberated.

 

Text 96

 

saura-puräëe

astéha mathurä näma

tréñu lokeñu viçrutä

kåñëa-päda-rajo-miçra-

bälukäpüta-véthikä

sparçanena naras tasya

mucyate sarva-bandhanät

saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; asti-is; iha-here; mathurä-Mathurä; näma-named; tréñu lokeñu-in the three worlds; viçrutä-famous; kåñëa-of Kåñëa; päda-of the feet; rajaù-with the dust; miçra-mixed; bälukäpüta-véthikä-purified pathways; sparçanena-by the touch; naraù-a person; tasya-of that; mucyate-is liberated; sarva-bandhanät-from all bonds.

In the Çaura Purän„a it is said:

Here is the place named Mathurä, famous in the three worlds, and its pathways purified by dust mixed with the dust of Kåñëa's feet. By its touch a person becomes liberated from all bondage.

 

Text 97

 

mathurä-khaëòe

mathuräyäà vasiñyämi

yasyämi mathurä-purém

iti yasya bhaved buddhiù

so 'pi bandhäd vimucyate

mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-khaëòa; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vasiñyämi-I will live; yasyämi-I will go; mathurä-purém-to Mathurä; iti-thus; yasya-of whom; bhaved-may be; buddhiù-conception; saù api-he; bandhäd-from bondage; vimucyate-is liberated.

 

In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

I will live in Mathurä. I will go to Mathurä. A person who thinks in this way becomes free from material bondage.

 

Text 98

 

atha viñëu-loka-pradatvam. brahmäëòe

ye paçyanty acyutaà devaà

mäthure devaké-sutam

te viñëu-lokam äsädya

na cyavante kadäcana

atha-now; viñëu-loka-Viñëuloka; pradatvam-giving; brahmäëòe-in the Brahmäëòa Puräëa; ye-who; paçyanti-see; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; devam-Lord; mäthure-in Mathurä; devaké-sutam-the son of Devaké; te-they; viñëu-lokam-Viñëuloka; äsädya'attaining; na-not; cyavante-fall down; kadäcana-ever.

 

Mathurä Grants Residence in Viñëuloka

In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:

They who in Mathurä see the Deity of Devaké's son, the spog who never falls down, attain Viñëuloka and never fall down.

 

Text 99

 

yäträà karoti kåñëasya

çraddhayä yaù samähitaù

sarva-päpair vinirmukto

viñëulokaà sa gacchati

yäträm-journey; karoti-does; kåñëasya-in Kåñëa; çraddhayä-with faith; yaù-who; samähitaù'assembled; sarva-päpair-from all sins; vinirmuktaù-free; viñëulokam-to Viñëuloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

A person who, filled with faith in Lord Kåñëa, goes on a journey there, becomes free from all sins and goes to Viñëuloka.

 

Text 100

 

mükä jaòändha-vadhiräs

tapo-niyama-varjitäù

kälenaiva måtä ye ca

gacchanti viñëu-mandiram

mükäh-dumb; jaòa-foolish; andha-blind; vadhiräùand deaf; tapo-niyama-varjitäù-without austerity; kälena-in time; eva-indeed; måtäù-after death; ye-who; ca-and; gacchanti-go;û viñëu-mandiram-the palace of Lord Viñëu.

 

The deaf, dumb, blind, foolish, and they who hasve no austerity or sense-control, who in the course of time die in Mathurä, go to Lord Viñëu's palace.

 

Text 101

 

sarpa-dañöäù paçu-hatäù

pävakämbu-vinäçitäù

labdhäpa-måtyavo ye ca

mäthure hari-loka-gäù

sarpa-by a snake; dañöäù-bitten; paçu-by a wild beast; hatäù-killed; pävaka-by fire; ambu-or water; vinäçitäù-killed; labdhäpa-måtyavaù-who die; ye-who; ca-and; mäthure-in Mathurä; hari-loka-to Lord Hari's planet; gäù-go.

 

They who, bitten by a snake, killed by a wild beast, consumed by flames, or drowned in water, die in Mathurä, attain the planet of Lord Hari.

 

Text 102

 

ädi-värähe

kalpa-grämeëa kià tasya

väräëasyä ca vä çubhe

mathuräyäà tu yat puëyaà

tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; kalpa-grämeëa-for many kalpas; kim-what is the use?; tasya-of that; väräëasyäh-at varanasi; ca-and; vä'or; çubhe-O beautiful one; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; yat-that; puëyam-piety; tasya-of that; puëya-phalam-pious result; çåëu

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

"What is the use of living for many kalpas at Väräëasé, O beautiful one, when the same pious result is easily attained at Mathurä? Listen, and I will tell you of that pious result.

 

Text 103

 

mathuräà ca samäsädyä yaù kaçcid måyate bhuvi

api kéöaù pataìgo vä

jäyate sa caturbhujaù

mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and; samäsädya-attaining; yaù kaçcid-someone; måyate-dies; bhuvi-in this world; api-even; kéöaù'a worm or a bug; pataìgaù-a moth or a bird; vä-or; jäyate-is born; sah-he; caturbhujaù-with four arms.

 

A human, worm, insect, moth, or bird who goes to Mathura' and dies there, becomes reborn as a four-armed resident of the spiritual world.

 

Text 104

 

gautaméya-tantre

mathnäti sarva-päpäni

dadäti paramäà gatim

uttamo hi naro yatra

tena sä mathurä småtä

gautaméya-tantre-in the gautaméya Tantra; mathnäti-crushes; sarva-all; päpäni-sins; dadäti'gives; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination; uttamaù-ultimate; hi-indeed; naraù-a person; yatra-where; tena-by him; sä-this; mathurä-Mathurä; småtä-remembered.

 

In the Gautaméya-tantra it is said:

The place that crushes (math, all sins and grants the supreme destination where the Supreme Person resides, is known as Mathurä.

 

Text 105

 

sarväbhiñöa-pradatvam. brahmäëòa-puräëe

satyaà satyaà muni-çreñöha

brüve çapatha-pürvakam

sarväbhiñöa-pradaà nänyan

mathuräyäù samaà kvacit

sarva-all; abhiñöa-desires; pradatvam-giving; brahmäëòa-puräëe-in the brahmäëòa Puräëa; satyam-true; satyam-true; muni-sages;çreñöha-best; brüve-I say; çapatha-pürvakam-with a vow; sarva-all; abhiñöa-desires;pradam-giving; na-not; anyat-another; mathuräyäù-to Mathurä; samam-equal; kvacit-anywhere.

 

Mathura' Fulfills All Desireñ

In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:

It is true! It is true! O sage, I vow that it is true! No other place fulfills all desires as Mathura' does!

 

Text 106

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

kñetra-pälo mahä-devo

vartate yatra sarvadä

yatra viçränti-térthaà ca

tatra kià durlabhaà phalam

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; kñetra-pälaù-protector; mahä-devaù-Mahädeva; vartate-is; yatra-where; sarvadä-always; yatra-where; viçränti-tértham-Viçränti-tértha; ca-and; tatra-there; kim-what?; durlabham-difficult to attain; phalam-result.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

In Mathurä, where the Supreme Lord is the all-pervading protector, and where there are places of His transcendental pastimes, what result is difficult to attain?

 

Text 107

 

padmottara-khaëòe

tri-varga-dä käminäà yä

mumukñüëäà ca mokñadä

bhaktécchor bhaktidä kas taà

mathuräà näçrayed budhaù

padmottara-khaëòe-in Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; tri-varga-dä-giving the three goals; käminäm-of they who desire; yä-which; mumukñüëäm-of they who wish liberation; ca-and; mokñadä-giver of liberation; bhakti-icchor-of one who desires bhakti; bhaktidä-giver of bhakti; kaù-who?; tam-this; mathuräm-Mathurä; na-not; äçrayed-takes shelter; budhaù-wise.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

What wise man would not take shelter of of Mathurä, which gives the three goals of life to they who desire them, which gives liberation to they who hanker after liberation, and which gives devotional service to they who desire devotional service?

 

Text 108

tatraiva pätäla-khaëòe pärvaté-praçnaù

uktodbhütaç ca mahimä

mathuräyä jaöädhara

muner bhuvo vä saritaù

prabhavaù kena vä vibho

kåñëasya vä prabhävo 'yaà

samyogasya pratäpavän

 

tatra-there;iva-like; pätäla-khaëòe-in thre Patala-khaëòa; pärvaté-praçnaù-Parvati's question; ukta-said; udbhütaù-manifested; ca-and; mahimä-glory; mathuräyä-of Mathurä; jaöädhara-O Çiva; muner-of the sage; bhuvaù-of the world; vä-or; saritaù-of the rivers; prabhavaù-glory; kena-by what?; vä-or; vibhaù-O Lord; kåñëasya-of Kåñëa; vä-or; prabhävaù-glory; ayam-this; samyogasya-contact; pratäpavän-powerful.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, Pärvaté asks the following question:

O Jaöädhara, You have already described the glory of Mathurä. What is the glory of the sages, the ground, and the rivers there? What is the great glory of Kåñëa there?

 

Text 109

 

tatraiva çré-mahädevottaram

na bhümika-prabhävaç ca

sarito vä varänane

åñinäà na prabhävaç ca

prabhävo viñëu-tärake

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-mahädeva-Lord Mahädeva's uttaram-reply; na-not; bhümika-of ground; prabhävaù-glory; ca-and; saritaù-of rivers; vä-or; varänane-O girl with the beautiful face; åñinäm-of sages; na-not; prabhävaù-glory; ca-and; prabhävaù-glory; viñëu-tärake-of Lord Viñëu's täraka potency.

 

Çré Mahädeva replied:

O girl with a beautiful face, this is not the glory of ordinary ground, rivers, and sages. This is the glory of Lord Viñëu's täraka potency.

 

Text 110

tathä päraka-cic-chakter

ubhe tat-pada-kärake

tad eva çåëu bho devi

prabhävo yena vartate

tathä-so; päraka-cé-chakter-from the päraka potency; ubhe-both; tat-pada-kärake-cause; tad-this; eva-indeed; çåëu-hear; bhaù-O; devi-O goddess; prabhävaù-glory; yena-how;û vartate-is.

 

The glory here is also manifest from the spiritual päraka potency. O goddess, please hear of these two potencies.

 

Text 111

 

çré-kåñëa-mahimä sarvas

cic-chakter yaù pravartate

tärakaà pärakaà tasya

prabhävo 'yam anähataù

tarakäê jäyate muktiù

prema-bhaktiç ca pärakaö

çré-kåñëa-of Kåñëa; mahimä-glory; sarvaùall; cé-chakter-spiritual potency; yaù-who; pravartate-is; tärakam-täraka; pärakam-päraka; tasya-of that; prabhävaù-glory; ayam-this; anähataù-glorious; tarakäj-from täraka; jäyate-is born; muktiù-liberation; prema-bhaktiù-pure devotional service; ca-and; pärakaö-from päraka.

 

All Kåñëa's glories are manifest from His spiritual potency. His glories are His täraka potency and His päraka potency. From His täraka potency liberation is manifest. From His päraka potency loöing devotional service is manifest.

 

Text 112

 

tatraiva çré-bhagavad-väkyam

ubhau manträö ubhe nämni

madéya-präëa-vallabhe

nänä-nämäni manträç ca

tan-madhye säram ucyate

tatra-there;iva çré-bhagavad-of the Lord; väkyam-words; ubhau-both; manträv-mantras; ubhe-âoth; nämni-names; madéya-My; präëa-life; vallabhe-dear; nänä-various; nämäni-names; manträù-mantras; ca-and; tan-madhye'in the midst; säram-best; ucyate-is said.

There also the Supreme Lord says:

O girl more dear to me than life, in this way there are two mantras and two names. Among all mantras and names they are said to be the best.

 

Text 113

 

ajïätam athava jïätaà

tärakaà japate yadi

yatra tatra bhaven måtyuù

käçyäà tu phalam ädiçet

ajïätam-not known; athavä-or; jïätam-known; tärakam-täraka; japate-chants; yadi'if; yatra-where; tatra-there; bhavet-is; måtyuù-death; käçyäm-in Väräëasé; tu-indeed; phalam'result; ädiçet-shows.

 

If a person knowingly or unkowingly chants the täraka mantra, then no matter where he dies, he attains the result of dying in Väräëasé.

 

Text 114

 

vartate yasya jihvägre

sa pumäl loka-pävanaù

chinatti sarva-päpäni

käçé-väsa-phalaà labhet

vartate-is; yasya-of whom; jihvägre-on the tip of the tongue; sah-he; pumän-person; loka-pävanaù-purifying the world; chinatti-cuts; sarva-all; päpäni-sins; käçé-in Väräëasé; väsa-residence; phalam-result; labhet-attains.

 

He on whose tongue the name täraka appears, purifies the people of the worlds. He breaks all sins. He attains the result of living at Väräëasé.

 

Text 115

 

iti täraka-mantro 'yaà

yas tu käçyäà pravartate

sa eva mäthure devi

vartate 'tra varänane

iti-thus; täraka-mantro ayam-this täraka mantra; yaù-who; tu-indeed; käçyäm-in Väräëasé; pravartate'is; sah-he; eva-indeed; mäthure-in Mathurä; devi-O goddess; vartate-is; atra-here; varänane-O girl with the beautiful face.

O goddess, O girl with the beautiful face, even though he lives in Väräëasé, a person who chants this täraka mantra actually lives here in Mathurä.

 

Text 116

 

atha pärakaà ucyeta

yathä-mantraà yathä-balam

pärakaà yatra varteta

åddhi-siddhi-samägamaù

atha-now; pärakam-päraka; ucyeta-is said; yathä-as; mantram-mantra; yathä-balam-as far as there is power; pärakam-päraka; yatra-where; varteta-is; åddhi-siddhi-samägamaù-powers and opulences.

 

When the powerful päraka mantra is chanted, spiritual opulences and perfections appear.

 

Text 117

 

püjyo bhavati trailokye

çatäyur jäyate pumän

añöa-siddhi-samäyukto

vartate yatra pärakam

püjyaù-worshiped; bhavati-is; trailokye-in the three worlds; çatäyur-a life of 100 years; jäyate-is âorn; pumän'person; añöa-siddhi-samäyuktaù-with the 8 mysté powers; vartate-is; yatra-where; pärakam-päraka.

 

A person who chants the päraka mantra becomes worshiped by the three worlds. He lives for a hundred years. He attains the eight perfections.

 

Text 118

 

pärakaà yasya jihvägre

tasya santoña-vartitä

paripürëo bhavet kämaù

satya-saìkalpatä tathä

pärakam-päraka; yasya-of whom; jihvägre-on the tongue; tasya-of him; santoña-vartitähappiness; paripürëaù-full; bhavet-is; kämaù-desire; satya-saìkalpatä-wishes become true; tathä-as.

 

A person who places the päraka mantra on the tip of his tongue becomes happy. His desires become fulfilled.

 

Text 119

 

dvi-vidhä prema-bhaktis tü çrutä dåñöä tathaiva ca

akhaëòa-paramänandas

tad-gato jïeya-lakñaëaù

dvi-vidhä-two kinds; prema-bhaktiù-loving devotion; tu-indeed; çrutä-heard; dåñöä-seen; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ca-and; akhaëòa-unbroken; parama-änandaùbliss; tad-gataù-attained; jïeya-lakñaëaù-known.

 

Prema-bhakti (devotional service in pure love of God, is of two kinds: that attained by hearing about Me and that attained by seeing Me. A person who has thus fallen in love with Me becomes filled with a bliss that never breaks.

 

Text 120

 

açru-pätaà kvacin nåtyaà

kvacit premäti-vihvalaù

kvacit tasya mahä-mürcchä

mad-guëo géyate kvacit

açru-pätam-shedding tears; kvacit-sometimes; nåtyam-dancing; kvacit-sometimes; premäti-vihvalaù-overcome with love; kvacit-sometimes; tasya-of him; mahä-mürcchä-fainting; mad-guëaù-My virtues; géyate-glorified; kvacit-sometimes.

 

Sometimes he sheds tears. Sometimes he dances. Sometimes he becomes overcome with love. Sometimes he faints. Sometimes he glorifies Me in song.

 

Text 121

 

atha prapaïcätétam. ädi-värähe

anyaiva käcit sä såçöir

vidhätur vyatirekiëé

na yat kñetra-guëän vaktum

éçvaro 'péçvaro yataù

atha-now; prapaïca-the material world; atétam-beyond; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anya-another eva-indeed; käcit-certain; sä-it; såçöir-creation; vidhätur-of the creator; vyatirekiëé-distinguished; na-not; yat-what; kñetra-of the place; guëän-virtues; vaktum-to describe» éçvaraù-able; api-even; éçvaraù-Çiva; yataù-because.

 

Mathura' is Beyond the Material World of Five Elements

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Mathura' was not created by Brahmä. Even Lord Çiva has not the power to properly describe Mathurä's glories.

 

Text 122

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

tan-maëòalaà mäthuraà hi

viñëu-cakropari sthitam

padmäkäraà sadä tatra

vartate çäçvataà nåpa

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tan-maëòalam- mäthuram-the circle of Mathurä; hi-indeed; viñëu-cakra-upari-above Lord Viñëu's circle; sthitam-situated; padma-äkäram-in the form of a lotus; sadä-always; tatra-there; vartate-is; çäçvatam-eternaly; nåpa-O king.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

O king, this circle of Mathurä is like a lotus eternally above the circle of Lord Viñëu's realm.

 

Text 123

 

pädme pätäla-khaëòe

åñir mäthura-nämatra

tapaù kurvati çäçvate

tato 'sya mäthuraà nämä-

bhavad äòhyaà çriyä yutam

pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; åñir-sage; mäthura-näma-named Mäthura; atra-here; tapaù kurvati-performs austerities; çäçvate-always; tataù-therefore; asya-of him; mäthuram-Mathurä; näma-name; abhavad-was; äòhyam-enriched; çriyä-the goddess of fortune; yutam-with.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

A sage named Mäthura performed austerities there for a long time. Beautiful Mathurä is named after him.

 

Text 124

 

tatraiva nirväëa-khaëòe

nityaà me mathuräà viddhi

vanaà våndävanaà tathä

yamunäà gopa-kanyaç ca

tathä gopäla-bälakän

tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirväëa-khaëòa; nityam-always; me-My; mathuräm-Mathurä; viddhi-know; vanam-forest; våndävanam-Vrndavana; tathä-so; yamunäm-Yamunä; gopa-kanyaù-gopés; ca-and; tathä-so; gopäla-bälakän-gopa boys.

 

In that same book, in the Nirväëa-khaëòa, it is said:

Know that My Mathurä is eternal. So also is Våndävana forest. So also are the Yamunä, the gopés, and the gopa boys.

 

Text 125

 

aho na jänanti narä duräçayäù

purià madéyäà paramäà sanätaném

surendra-nägendra-munéndra-saàstutäà

manoramäà täà mathuräà paräà gatém

ahaù-Oh; na-not; jänanti-know; naräh-people; duräçayäù-wicked; purim-city; madéyäm-My; paramäm-supreme; sanätaném-eternal; surendra-leaders of the demigods; nägendra-leaders of the nagas; munéndra-leaders of the sages; saàstutäm-glorified; manoramäm-enchanting; täm- mathuräm-this Mathurä; paräm- gatém-the supreme destination.

 

Wicked men cannot understand My eternal, beautiful, transcendental city of Mathurä, which is the supreme destination, and which is glorified by the kings of the demigods, nägas, and sages.

 

Text 126

 

atha deva-traya-rüpatvam. pädme pätäla-khaëòe

ma-käre ca u-käre ca

a-käre cänta-saàsthite

mäthuraù çabda-niñpanna

om-kärasya tataù samaù

atha-now; deva-traya-rüpatvam-the form of the three demigods; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ma-käre-the syllable ma; ca-and; u-käre-the syllable u; ca-and; a-käre-the syllable a; ca-and; anta-saàsthite-at the end; mäthuraù-Mathurä; çabda-niñpanna-as sound; om-kärasya-of om; tataù-to that; samaù-equal.

 

Mathura' Is the Form of the Three Deities

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

Mathura' is the same as the syllable aum. The a, u, and m in aumkara come from the same letters in the word Mathurä.

 

Text 127

 

mahä-rüdro ma-käraù syäd

u-käro viñëu-saàjïakaù

a-käro 'ntyas tu brahmä syät

tri-çabdaà mäthuraà bhavet

mahä-rüdraù-Çiva; ma-käraù-the letter m; syäd-is; u-käraù-the letter u; viñëu-saàjïakaù-is Viñëu; a-käraù-the letter a; antyaù-at the end; tu-indeed; brahmä-Brahmä; syät-is; tri-three; çabdam-sounds; mäthuram-Mathurä; bhavet-is.

 

In the syllable aum the m is Lord Çiva, the u is Lord Viñëu, and the a is Lord Brahmä. These three letters are the same as Mathurä.

 

Text 128

 

tadä varaù çreñöha uktaù

satya eväbhavat tataù

sä tri-devamayé mürtir

mäthuré tiñöhate sadä

tadä-then; varaù çreñöhah-the best; uktaù-said; satye-in truth; eva-indeed; abhavat-was; tataù-then; sä-that; tri-devamayé-the three demigods; mürtir-form; mäthuré-Mathurä; tiñöhate-stands; sadä-always.

Of these this is the best statement. Of these this is the truth. Mathura' is eternally the form of these three demigods.

 

Text 129

 

atha çré-viñëu-bhakti-pradatvam. pädme uttara-khaëòe

anyeñu puëya-tértheñu

muktir eva mahä-phalam

muktaiù prärthya harer bhaktir

mathuräyäà ca labhyate

 

atha-now; çré-viñëu-to Lord Viñëu; bhakti-devotion; pradatvam-giving; pädme uttara-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; anyeñu-in other; puëya-tértheñu-holy places; muktir-liberation; eva-indeed; mahä-phalam-great result; muktaiù-by the liberated; prärthya-requested; harer-of Lord Hari; bhaktir-devotion; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; labhyate-is attained.

 

Mathura' Gives Lord Viñëu's Devotional Service

In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa it is said:

Liberation is the great result attained at other holy places. Devotional service to Lord Hari, for which the liberated souls pray, is attained at Mathurä.

 

Text 130

 

tri-rätram api ye tatra

vasanti manujä mune

harir dadyät sukhaà teñäà

muktänäm api durlabham

tri-rätram-three nights; api-even; ye-who; tatra-there; vasanti-reside; manujäh-persons; mune'O sage; harir-Hari; dadyät-gives; sukham-happiness; teñäm-to them; muktänäm-liberated; api-even; durlabham-difficult to attain.

 

O sage, to they who stay there for three nights, Lord Hari happily gives what even the liberated souls cannot attain.

 

Text 131

 

brahmäëòa-puräëe

trailokya-varti-térthänäà

sevanäd durlabhä hi yä

paränandamayé siddhir

mathurä-sparça-mätrataù

brahmäëòa-puräëe-in the Brahmäëòa Puräëa; trailokya-varti-in the three worlds; térthänäm-of the holy places; sevanäd-by service; durlabhä-rare; hi-indeed; yä-which; paränandamayé-blissful; siddhir-perfection; mathurä-of Mathurä; sparça-mätrataù-simply by the touch.

 

In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:

The blissful perfection difficult to attain by serving all holy places in the three worlds is attained by simply touching Mathurä.

 

Text 132

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

smaranti mathuräà ye cä mäthureçaà viçämpate

sarva-tértha-phalaà teñäà

syäc ca bhaktir harau parä

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; smaranti-meditiate; mathuräm-on Mathurä; ye-who; ca-and; mäthureçam-Mathurä's king; viçämpate-O king; sarva-tértha-phalam-result of all holy places;; teñäm-of them; syäc-is; ca-and; bhaktir-devotion; harau-to Lord Hari; parä-supreme.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura-khaëòa, it is said:

O king, they who meditate on the king of Mathura' attain transcendental devotion to Lord Hari, which is the fruit of all pilgrimages.

 

Text 133

 

atha svataù parama-phalatvam. pädme pätäla-khaëòe

aho madhu-puré dhanyä

vaikuëöhäc ca garéyasé

dinam ekaà niväsena

harau bhaktiù prajäyate

atha-now; svataù-personally; parama-phalatvam-the greatest result; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; madhu-puré-Mathurä; dhanyä-opulent; vaikuëöhäc-than Vaikuëöha; ca-and; garéyasé-greatesr; dinam-day; ekam-one; niväsena-by residence; harau'for Lord Hari; bhaktiù-devotion; prajäyate-is born.

 

Mathura' Gives the Greatest Result

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

Opulent Mathura' is greater than Vaikuëöha. Living there for a single day creates genuine devotion to Lord Hari.

 

Text 134

 

atha sapta-puréëäà tu

sarvotkåñöaà tu mäthuram

çrüyatäà mahimä devi

vaikuëöha-bhuvanottamaù

atha-now; sapta-7; puréëäm-of the cities; tu-indeed; sarva-utkåñöam-best of all; tu-indeed; mäthuram'Mathurä; çrüyatäm-should be heard; mahimä-glory; devi-O goddess; vaikuëöha-in thre spiritual world;bhuvana-abode; uttamaù-highest.

Mathura' is the best of the seven holy cities. O goddess, please hear of its glories greater than Vaikuëöha.

 

Text 135

 

ädi-värähe

bhür-bhuvah-svas-tale väpi

na pätäla-tale 'malam

nordhva-loke mayä dåñöaà

tädåk kñetraà vasundhare

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; bhür-bhuvah-svas-tale-on Bhur, Bhuvar, and Svar; vä-or; api-and; na-not; pätäla-tale'in hell; amalam-pure; na-not; ürdhva-loke-in the higher world; mayä-by Me; dåñöam-seen; tädåk-like this; kñetram-a pläe; vasundhare-O earth.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Not in Bhürloka, Bhuvarloka, Svarloka, Pätälaloka, or Urdhvaloka have I seen any place like this, O earth-goddess.

 

Text 136

 

värähe

labhänäà mathurä-läbho

jïänänäà jïänam uttamam

priténäà paramä pritir

gaténäà gatir uttamä

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; labhänäm-of attainments; mathurä-of Mathurä; läbhaù-the attainment» jïänänäm-of knowledges; jïänam-knowledge; uttamam-utlimate; priténäm-of loves; paramä-ultimate; pritir-love; gaténäm-of goals; gatir-goal; uttamä-ultimate.

 

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

Attainment of Mathura' is the greatest of attainments. Knowledge of Mathura' is the greatest of knowledges. Love for Mathura' is the greatest of loves. The goal of Mathura' is the greatest of goals.

 

Text 137

 

rahasyänäà rahasyaà ca

kriyänäà ca mahä-kriyä

etan maraëa-käle tu

smartavyaà manasäpi ca

yadécchet paramäà siddhià

saàsärasya ca mokñaëam

rahasyänäm-of secrets; rahasyam-the secret; ca-and; kriyänäm-of actions; ca-and; mahä-kriyä-greatest action; etat-this; maraëa-käle-at the time of death; tu-indeed; smartavyam-should be remembered; manasä-by the heart; api-and; ca-and; yadi-if; icchet-desires; paramäm-supreme; siddhim-perfection; saàsärasya-of the material world; ca-and; mokñaëam-liberation.

 

The secret of Mathura' is the greatest secret. Actions in Mathura' are the greatest actions. If one yearns for the supreme perfection and release from the cycle of birth and death, he should, with all his heart, meditate on Mathura' at the time of his death.

 

Text 138

 

atha mathurä-maëòala-sémäjïänam. ädi-värähe

viàçatir yojanänäà tu

mäthuraà mama maëòalam

atha-now; mathurä-maëòala-of the circle of Mathurä; séma-boundaries; jïänam-boundaries are unknown; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; viàçatir'20; yojanänäm-of yojanas; tu-indeed; mäthuram-Mathura' mama-My; maëòalam-circle.

 

The Boundaries of the Circle of Mathurä Are Unknown

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

My circle of Mathura' is 20 yojanas (160 miles).

 

Text 139

 

tathä pädme yamunä-mähätmye

ramyam apsarasäà sthänaà

yasmimç caïcalatäà gataù

yäyävaraù purä vipras

tapasvé vijitendriyaù

tathä-as; pädme yamunä-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Yamuna-mahatmya; ramyam-charming; apsarasäm-of apsaras; sthänam-place; yasmin-where; caïcalatäm- gataù-went; yäyävaraù-Yäyävara; purä'before; vipraùvipra; tapasvé-austere; vijitendriyaù-controlling the senses.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Yamunä-mähatmya, it is said:

One day an austere, sense-controlled brähmaëa named Yäyävara went to the beautiful place Apsaras-tértha.

 

Text 140

 

cira-kälaà prataptaà tam

indra-çäpägninärditam

spåñöä väri-kanenenaà

mocayitvä tu pätakät

vimänenärka-varëena

präpayät taà surälayam

cira-kälam-for a long time; prataptam-austerities; tam-this; indra-Indra's; çäpa-curse; agninä-by the fire; arditam-tormented; spåñöä-touched;û väri-kanena-by a drop of water; enam-this; mocayitvä-freeing; tu-indeed; pätakät-from sins; vimänena-by an airmplace; arka-varëena-splendid as the sun; präpayät-brought; tam-him; surälayam-to the abode of the demigods.

 

Tormented by the fire of Indra's curse, he performed austerities for a long time, but it was only when he was touched by a single drop of water there that he at once became free from his sin and an airplane splendid as the sun took him to the home of the demigods.

 

Text 141

 

püjyamänädareëärghyair

vänaprasthair yathä-vidhi

mäthura-maëòalaà praptä

tasmäd devarñi-sevitä

püjyamäna-worshiped; adareëa-with respect; arghyair-with arghya; vänaprasthair-vy Vanaprasthas; yathä-vidhi'following the rules; mäthura-maëòalam-the circle of Mathurä; praptä-attained; tasmäd'from that; devarñi-by Närada; sevitä-served.

 

Respectfully worshiped with arghya by the vänaprasthas and served by the sages, the Yamunä river flows through Mathura'-maëòala.

 

Text 142

 

pävayitvä kurün deçän

çürasenän samäviçat

vanäni dvädaça sphéta-

sphétäni guëa-sampadä

pävayitvä-purifying; kurün-Kurus; deçän-lands; çürasenän-Surasenas; samäviçat-entered; vanäni-forests; dvädaça-12; sphéta-sphétäni-great; guëa-sampadä-rich with good qualities.

 

After purifying the Kuru and Çürasena lands, it enters twelve great and glorious forests.

 

Text 143

 

kramäd viçräntim äsädya

viçräntä keçavälaye

sudarçanopari-gatä

gata-çrama-samépa-gä

kramäd-gradually; viçräntim-Viçränti; äsädya-attaining; viçräntä keçavälaye-abode of Kåñëa; sudarçana-Sudarsana; upari-gatä-above; gata-çrama-samépa-gä-near Gataçrama.

 

Gradually it reaches Viçränti-tértha in the abode of Lord Keçava. It goes to Sudarçana and then it flows by Viçräma-ghäöa.

 

Text 144

 

ity upakramya

açliñöa vasudevena

sat-kåtyäbhyarcya täpané

sampräptä puëya-salilä

su-puëyaà dhrauvyam äçramam

iti-thus; upakramya-following; açliñöa-embraced; vasudevena-by Kåñëa; sat-kåtya abhyarcya'respectfully worshiped; täpané-Ymauna; sampräptä-attained; puëya-salilä-pure waters; su-puëyam-sacred; dhrauvyam äçramam-Dhruva's äçrama.

 

Lord Väsudeva respectfully worships and embraces the Yamunä, which with its pure waters flows to pure Dhruva-äçrama.

 

Text 145

 

sampräptä puëya-salilä

su-puëyaà reëukäçramam

dékñito yatra rämo 'bhüt

sarva-kñatra-kñayädhvare

sampräptä-attained; puëya-salilä-pure water; su-puëyam-sacred; reëukäçramam-Renukasrama; dékñitaù-initiated; yatra-where; rämaù-Rama; abhüt-was; sarva-kñatra-kñayädhvare-in the sacrifice to kill all the kçatriyas.

 

With its pure waters it flows to pure Reëuka'-äçrama, where Lord Räma was initiated to perform a yaj,sy 241a to kill all the kñatriyas.

Text 146

 

tataù prayätä yamunä

bharatasyäçvamedhikam

iñöaà çäkuntaleyena

säraìgair yatra saptabhiù

tataù-then; prayätä-gone; yamunä-Yamuna; bharatasya-of Bharata; açvamedhikam-asvamedha; iñöam-done; çäkuntaleyena-the son of Sakuntalä; säraìgair-saranga-yajnas» yatra-where; saptabhiù-seven.

 

Then the Yamuna' flows by the place where Bharata performed an äçvamedha-yajïa and the place where Çakuntalä's son performed seven säraìga-yajïas.

 

Text 147

 

atha sa saptabhir medhyaiù

somapendro 'py amadyata

tataù pratyaìmukhi bhütvä

sampräptä çaukaréà purém

yasyaà dharäà samuddhartuà

utpannaç cädiçükaraù

atha-now; sah-he; saptabhir medhyaiù-with seven sacrifices; somapendraù-Indraq; api-also; amadyata'was pleased; tataù-then; pratyäìmukhi bhütvä-turning west; sampräptä-attained; çaukarém- puré-Saukari Puri; yasyam-in which; dharäm-earth; samuddhartum- utpannaù-lifted; ca-and; adiçükaraù-Varäha.

 

Indra was pleased when he drank soma at those seven yajïas. Then the river turns west and flows to Çaukaré Puré, where Lord Varäha lifted the earth.

 

Text 148

 

tatas taà nagarià çauré

bhütvä pratyaìmukhi punaù

parikramya viniñkräntä

jihma-gatyeva pannagé

tataù-then; tam-that; nagarim-city; çauré bhütvä pratyaìmukhi punaù parikramya -continuing west;viniñkräntä-crooked; jihma-gatyä iva pannagé-like a snake.

 

Continuing west, the river circles that city and then continues with crooked motions as a snake.

 

Text 149

tataù sa çürasenebhyaù

païcalänäà vimukti-dä

iñöakäçramam äpede

vaçiñöhäyatanaà mahat

tataù-then; sa-it; çürasenebhyaù-from the land of Surasena; païcalänäm-to the people pof Pancala-desa; vimukti-liberation; dä-giving; iñöakäçramam-Istakasrama; äpede-attained; vaçiñöhäyatanam-the home of Vaçiñöa Muni; mahat-great.

 

Then it leaves the land of Çurasena and gives liberation to the people of Päïcäla-deça, and then it flows to iñöaka-äçrama, the home of Vaçiñöa Muni.

 

Text 150

 

etena yäyä-varam adhikåtya çaukaré-vaöeçvara-paryantaà mathurä-maëòalaà jïeyam. evam eva sarväsu dikñö api jïeyam. viàçati-yojanätmake bahu-térthavat tvayä viçeñaù.

etena-thus; yäyä-varam-Yayavara; adhikåtya-in relation; çaukaré-vaöeçvara-paryantam-from Saukari to Vatesvara; jïeyam-is known; evam-thus; eva-indeed; sarväsu dikñu-in all directions; api-also; jïeyam'known; viàçati-yojanätmake-20 yojanas; bahu-térthavat-like a great holy place; tvayä-by you; viçeña-specific.

 

In this way the circle of Mathura' goes from Yäyävara-äçrama to Çaukaré Puré to Vaçiñöha-äçrama. Turning to all directions, it makes a circle 20 yojanas (160 miles, in circumference. There are many holy places within that circle.

 

Text 151

 

mathurä-khaëòe

mathurä-maëòalaà tad dhi

yojanänäà tu dvädaçe

yatra tértha-sahasräëi

kåñëa-räma-kåtäni ca

mathurä-khaëòe-in Mathura'-khaëòa; mathurä-maëòalam-the circle of Mathurä; tad-that; hi-indeed; yojanänäm-of yojanas; tu-indeed; dvädaçe-12; yatra-where; tértha-holy places; sahasräëi-thousands; kåñëa-räma-kåtäni-done by Kåñëa and Balaräma; ca-and.

 

In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

The circle of Mathura' is 12 yojanas (96 miles, in circumference. Within it are thousands of holy places where Lord Kåñëa and Lord Räma enjoyed pastimes.

 

Text 152

 

tathä hi vaiçiñöhyam

gavyütir dvädaçamayé

dvädaçäraëya-samyutä

taträpi mathurä devi

sarva-siddhi-vidhäyiné

tathä hi-furthermore; vaiçiñöhyam-specific; gavyütir-krosas; dvädaçamayé-12; dvädaça-12; araëya-forests; samyutä-endowed; tatra-there; api'also; mathurä-Mathurä; devi-O goddess; sarva-siddhi-vidhäyiné-granting all perfections.

 

A Specifé Description (in the Mathurä-khaëòa)

Its measurement is 12 kroças (24 miles). It has twelve forests. O goddess, within it is Mathurä, which grants all perfections.

 

Text 153

 

taträpi padmäkåter vaiçiñöyam

idaà padmaà mahä-bhäge

sarveñäà mukti-däyakam

karëikäyäà sthito devi

keçavaù kleça-näçanaù

tatra-there; api-also; padma-of a lotus; äkåter-form; vaiçiñöyam-specific; idam-this; padmam-lotus; mahä-bhäge-O fortunate one; sarveñäm-to all; mukti-liberation; däyakam-giving; karëikäyäm-whorl; sthitaù-standing; devi-O goddess; keçavaù'Kåñëa; kleça-sufferings; näçanaù-destroying.

 

In the Same Scripture a Description of Mathura' as a Lotus Flower

O beautiful girl, this place is a great lotus flower that gives liberation to all. O goddess, in the whorl of this lotus Lord Keçava, the destroyer of troubles, stays.

 

Text 154

 

karëikäyäà måtä ye tu

te narä mukti-bhäginaù

madhya-paträ måtä ye ca

teñäà muktir vasundhare

karëikäyäm-in the whorl; måtäù-after death; ye-who; tu-indeed; te-they; naräù mukti-bhäginaù'liberated souls; madhya-paträ-in the middle leaf; måtäù-after death; ye-who; ca-and; teñäm-of them; muktir-liberation» vasundhare-O earth.

 

They who die in the whorl of this lotus become liberated. O earth-goddess,they who die in the middle leaves of this lotus become liberated.

 

Text 155

 

paçcime tu harià devaà

govardhana-niväsinäm

dåñövä taà deva-deveçaà

kià manaù paritapyase

paçcime-in the west; tu-indeed; harim- devam-the Deity of Lord Hari; govardhana-niväsinäm-residing on Govardhana Hill; dåñövä-having seen; tam- deva-deveçam-the master of the demigods; kim-what?; manaù-heart; paritapyase-suffers.

 

What heart, seeing the Deity of Lord Hari, who resides on Govardhana Hill in the western part of this lotus, and who is the master of the demigods, will remain unhappy?

 

Text 156

 

uttareëa tu govindaà

dåñövä devaà paraà çubham

näsau patati saàsäre

yävad ähüta-samplavam

uttareëa-in the north; tu-indeed; govindam-Lord Govinda; dåñövä-having seen; devam-Deity; param-transcendental; çubham-handsome; na-not; asau-he; patati-falls; saàsäre-into birth and death; yävad-as far as; ähüta-samplavam-an ocean.

 

A person who sees the handsome Deity of Lord Govinda in the northern part of this lotus will not fall into the ocean of repeated birth and death.

 

Text 157

 

viçränti-samjïakaà térthaà

pürva-patre vyavasthitam

yaà dåñövä tu naro yäti

muktià nästy atra saàçayaù

viçränti-Viçränti; samjïakam-named; tértham-holy place; pürva-eastern; patre-on the petal;û vyavasthitam-situated; yam-whom; dåñövä-having seen; tu-indeed; naraù-a person; yäti-attains; muktim-liberation; na-not; asti-is; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

A person who sees Viçränti-tértha on the eastern petals of this lotus attains liberation. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 158

 

dakñiëenottamaà viddhi

pratimäà divya-rüpiëém

mahä-käyäà su-rüpäà ca

keçaväkära-sannibhäm

yaà dåñövä manujo devi

brahmaloke mahéyate

dakñiëena-in the south; uttamam-supreme; viddhi-know; pratimäm-Deity; divya-rüpiném-splendid; mahä-käyäm-large; su-rüpäm-handsome; ca-and; keçava-äkära-sannibhäm-Keçava; yam-whim; dåñövä-having seen; manujaù-a person; devi-O goddess; brahmaloke-on Brahmaloka; mahéyate-glorified.

 

Know that in the south is a large, splendidly handsome Deity of Lord Keçava. O goddess, a person who sees this Deity becomes glorious in the spiritual world.

 

Text 159

 

athätra käla-viçeñe niväsa-phalam. ädi-värähe tatra jyaiñöhe

jyaiñöhasya çukla-dvädaçyäà

snätvä tu niyatendriyaù

mathuräyäà harià dåñövä

präpnoti paramäà gatim

atha-now; atra-here; käla-time; viçeñe-s[ecific; niväsa-of residence; phalam-result; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there; jyaiñöhe-in the month of Jyaistha; jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-dvädaçyäm-on the çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; tu-indeed; niyata-controlling; indriyaù-the senses; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-the Deity of Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti-attains; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.

 

The Result of Residing at Mathura' During Certain Specifé Times

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa the month of Jyaiñöha (May-June, is described:

A person who is sense-controlled and who bathes in Mathura' during the çukla-dvädaçi in the month of Jyaiñöha attains the supreme destination.

 

Text 160

 

cäturmäsye. ädi-värähe påthivyäà yäni térthäni

ä-samudra-saräàsi ca

mathuräyäà gamiñyanti

supte caiva janärdane

cäturmäsye-during Caturmasya; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; påthivyäm-on the earth; yäni-which; térthäni-holy places; ä-samudra-saräàsi-to the oceans and lakes; ca-and; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; gamiñyanti-will go; supte-asleep; ca-and; eva-certainly; janärdane-Kåñëa.

 

Residing in Mathura' During Caturmasya

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

When Lord Janärdana will go to sleep all holy places, lakes, and seas on the earth will go to Mathurä.

Note: Lord Kåñëa sleeps during the four months of Cäturmäsya.

 

Text 161

 

caturo varñikän mäsän

madhu-puryä vasemahi

sarväni tatra térthäni

vividhäni vasanti ca

caturaù-four; varñikän-of the monsoon season; mäsän-months; madhu-puryä-of Mathurä; vasemahi-let us reside; sarväni-all; tatra-there; térthäni-holy places; vividhäni-various; vasanti-reside; ca-and.

 

Let us reside in Mathura'-puré during the four months of the monsoon season, when all holy places also reside there.

 

Text 162

 

tatraiva janmäñöamyäm

janmäñöami-dine präpte

tatra yo mäà prapaçyati

janma-koöi-kåtaà päpaà

tat-kñaëäd eva naçyati

tatra-there; eva-indeed; janmäñöamyäm-on janmastami; janmäñöami-dine-when Janmastami day; präpte-has arrived; tatra-there; yaù-who; mam-Me;û prapaçyati-sees; janma-koöi-kåtam-done in millions of births; päpam-sin; tat-kñaëad-in that moment; eva'certainly; naçyati-perish.

 

Residing in Mathura' During Janmäñöamé

In the same scripture Lord Kåñëa says:

For a person who sees Me there (in Mathurä, during Janmäñöamé, the sins of millions of births perish in a single moment.

 

Text 163

 

bhädre mäsi mamäñöäbhyäà

yaù karoti mamärcanam

sarvaà päpaà parityajya

mama sthänaà sa gacchati

bhädre mäsi-in the month of Bhadra; mama-My; añöäbhyäm-on janmastami; yaù-who; karoti-does; mama-My;rcanam-worship; sarvam-all; päpam-sin» parityajya-leaving; mama-My; sthänam-abode; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

A person who worships Me during My Janmäñöamé in the month of Bhädra becomes free from all sins and goes to My abode.

 

Texts 164 and 165

 

sarvaà taptaà tapas tena

sarvaà dänaà ca taiù kåtam

yaiù kåtaà mathuräà gatvä

bhadreñöamyäà vasundhare

snätvä viçränti-tértheñu

püjanaà me 'valokanam

sarvam-all; taptam-austerities; tapaù-performed; tena-by him; sarvam-all; dänam-charity; ca-and; taiù-by them; kåtam-done;û yaiù-by whom; kåtam-done; mathuräm-to Mathurä; gatvä-having gone; bhadreñöamyäm-on auspicious Janmastami; vasundhare'O earth; snätvä-having bathed; viçränti-tértheñu-at Viçränti-tértha; püjanam-worship; me-of Me» avalokanam-sight.

 

All austerities are automatically performed and all charity automatically given by they who, going to Mathura' during Janmastami in the month of Bhadra, bathe in Viçränti-tértha, worship me, and see My Deity-form, O earth-goddess.

Text 166

 

viçeñataù kärttike. pädme kärttika-mähätmye närada-väkyam

yatra kuträpi deçe ca

kärttike snäna-dänataù

agni-hotra-samaà puëyaà

püjäyäà tu viçeñataù

viçeñataù-specifically; kärttike-in karttika; pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mahatmya; närada-of Narada; väkyam-words; yatra-where; kuträpi-in a certain; deçe-country; ca-and; kärttike-during Kärttika; snäna-from bathing; dänataù-and giving charity; agni-hotra-to an agnihotra sacrifice; samam-equal; puëyam-pious merit; püjäyäm-in worship; tu-indeed; viçeñataù-specifically.

 

Residing in Mathura' During the Month of Kärttika

In the Kärttika-mähätmya, Närada says:

By bathing in sacred places and giving charity during the month of Kärttika, a person in any country attains piety equal to an agnihotra-yajïa.

 

Text 167

 

kurukñetre koöi-guëo

gaìgäyäm api tat-samaù

tato 'dhikaù puñkare syäd

dvärakäyäà tu bhärgava

kurukñetre-in Kurukñetra; koöi-guëaù-millions of times; gaìgäyäm-in the Ganges; api-also; tat-samaù-equal to that; tataù-than that; adhikaù-greater; puñkare-in Puñkara; syäd-is; dvärakäyäm-in Dvärakä; tu-indeed; bhärgava-O Bhärgava.

 

When these activities are performed at Kurukñetra or on the banks of the Ganges, the benefit is multiplied by millions of times. The benefit is even greater at Puñkara or Dvaraka, O Bhärgava.

 

Text 168

 

kåñëa-sälokya-do mäsaù

püja-snänaiç ca kärttikaù

anyaù puryäs tat-samänä

bhavanti mathuräà vinä

kåñëa-sälokya-daù-giving residence on the same planet as Kåñëa; mäsaù-month; püja-with worship; snänaiù-bathing; ca-and; kärttikaù-Kärttika; anyaù'another; puryäù-of the city; tat-samänä-equal; bhavanti-are; mathuräm-Mathurä; vinä-without.

 

In Mathura' bathing and worship during the month of Kärttika place one on the same planet as Lord Kåñëa. No other holy place is equal to Mathurä.

 

Text 169

 

dämodaratvaà hi hares

tatraiväsit yataù kila

mathuräyäà tatas türjo

vaikuëöha-préti-vardhanaù

kärttiko mathuräyäà vai

paramävadhir iñyate

 

dämodaratvam-the state of being Dämodara; hi-indeed; hareùof Lord Hari; tatra-there; eva-indeed; äsét-was; yataù-because; kila-indeed» mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tataù-then; tu-indeed; ürjaù-Kärttika; vaikuëöha-Lord Vaikuëöha; préti-pleasure; vardhanaù-increasing; kärttikaù-Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai'indeed; parama-avadhir-the supreme destination; iñyate-is accepted.

 

The month of Kärttika, when Lord Hari enjoyed His Dämodara-pastime in Mathurä, delights Lord Vaikuëöha. The month of Kärttika spent in Mathura' brings the supreme destination.

 

Text 170

 

yathä mäghe prayägaù syäd

vaiçäkhe jähnavé tathä

kärttike mathurä sevyä

tatrotkarñaù paro na hi

yathä-as; maghe-in Magha; prayägaù-Prayäga; syäd-is; vaiçäkhe-in vaisakha; jähnavé-the Ganges; tathä-so; kärttike-in karttika; mathurä-Mathurä; sevyä-to be served; tatra-there; utkarñaù-excellence; paraù-better; na-not; hi-indeed.

 

As Prayäga should be served in the month of Mägha, and the Ganges in the month of Vaiçäkhä, so Mathura' should be served in the month of Kärttika. Nothing is better than that service.

 

Text 171

 

mathuräyäà narair ürje

snätvä dämodaro 'rcitaùkåñëa-rüpa hi te jïeyä

nätra käryä vicaraëä

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; narair-by people; ürje-in Kärttika; snätvä-having bathed; dämodaraù-Lord Dämodara; arcitaù-worshiped; kåñëa-rüpah-the form of Kåñëa; hi-indeed; te-they; jïeyäh-should be known; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicaraëä-doubt.

 

They who, after properly bathing, worship Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika, attain forms like that of Lord Kåñëa. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 172

 

durlabhaù kärttiko viprä

mathuräyäà nåëäm iha

yatrarcitaù svakaà rüpaà

bhaktebhyaù samprayacchati

durlabhaù-rare; kärttikaù-Kärttika; vipräh-O brähmaëas; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; nåëäm-of people; iha-here; yatra-where; arcitaù-worshiped; svakam-own; rüpam-form; bhaktebhyaù-to the devotees; samprayacchati-gives.

 

O brähmaëas, residence in Mathura' during Kärttika is a rare attainment for humans. To they who worship Him there and then the Lord gives their original spiritual forms.

 

Text 173

 

bhuktià muktià harir dadyäd

arcito 'nyatra sevinäm

bhaktim tu na dadäty eva

yato vaçya-karé hareù

bhuktim-sense gratification; muktim--liberation; harir-Kåñëa; dadyäd-gives; arcitaù-worshiped; anyatra-in another place; sevinäm-of the servants; bhaktim'devotional service; tu-indeed; na-not; dadäti-gives; eva-indeed; yataù-because; vaçya-karé-brought under the dominion; hareù-of Kåñëa.

 

When He is worshiped in any other place, Lord Hari gives only liberation or sense-gratification to His servants. He does not give them pure devotional service, for that service brings Him under their dominion.

Text 174

 

sät öaïjasä harer bhaktir

labhyate kärttike naraiù

mathuräyäà sakåd api

çré-dämodara-sevanät

sä-this; tu-indeed; aïjasä-easily; harer-to Kåñëa; bhaktir-devotion; labhyate-is attained; kärttike-in karttika; naraiù-by people; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sakåd-once; api-even; çré-dämodara-sevanät-from serving Lord Dämodara.

 

By once serving Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika, the people can easily attain pure devotional service to Lord Hari.

 

Text 175

 

mantra-dravya-vihiëaà ca

vidhi-hénaà ca püjanam

manyate kärttike devo

mathuräyäà mad-arcanam

mantra-mantras; dravya-offerings; vihiëam-without; ca-and; vidhi-proper rules; hénam-without; ca-and; püjanam-worship; manyate-is considered; kärttike-during Kärttika; devaù-the Lord; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; mad-arcanam-worship of Me.

 

They who, even without proper mantras and offerings, and without properly following the rules, worship Him in Mathura' during Kärttika, the Lord considers His true devotees.

 

Text 176

 

yasya päpasya yujyeta

maraëäntä hi niñkåtiù

tac-chuddhy-artham idaà proktaà

präyaçcittaà su-niçcitam

kärttike mathuräyäà vai

çré-dämodara-püjanam

yasya-of whom; päpasya-sin; yujyeta-engaged; maraëäntäh-to the time of death; hi-indeed; niñkåtiù'atonement; tä-chuddhy-artham-to purify; idam-this; proktam-is said; präyaçcittam-atonement; su-niçcitam-carefully considered; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; çré-dämodara-püjanam-worship of Lord Dämodara.

 

The perfect atonement to purify the sins of a lifetime is: worship Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika.

Text 177

 

sulabhä mathurä loke

pratyabdaà kärttikas tathä

tathäpi saàsarantéha

narä müòhä bhavämbudhau

sulabhä-easy to attain; mathurä-Mathurä; loke-in this world; pratyabdam-every year; kärttikaù-Kärttika» tathä-so; tathäpi-still; saàsaranti-go; iha-here; naräh-peple; müòhäh-bewildered; bhava-of repeated birth and death; ambudhau-in the ocean.

 

Although Mathura' is easy to visit in this world, and although Kärttika comes every year, the fools still swim in the ocean of repeated birth and death.

 

Text 178

 

kià yajïaiù kià tapobhir vä

térthair anyaiç ca sevitaiù

kärttike mathuräyäà ced

arcyate rädhikä-priyaù

kim-what is the use?; yajïaiù-of sacrifices; kim-what is the use?; tapobhir-of austerities; vä-or; térthair-holy places; anyaiù-of other; ca-and; sevitaiù-served; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ced-if; arcyate-is worshiped; rädhikä-Rädhä's; priyaù-beloved.

 

What is the use of yajïas? What is the use of austerities? What is the use of serving other holy places if Çrématé Rädhikä's beloved is worshiped in Mathura' during Kärttika?

 

Text 179

 

yäni sarväëi térthäni

nadä nadyaù saräàsi ca

kärttike nivasanty atra

mäthure sarva-maëòale

yäni-which; sarväni-all; térthäni-holy place; nadäh-streams; nadyaù-rivers; saräàsi-lakes; ca-and; kärttike-in Kärttika; nivasanti-reside; atra-here; mäthure sarva-maëòale-in the circle4 of Mathurä.

 

All holy places and all holy rivers, streams, and lakes reside in the circle of Mathura' during Kärttika.

 

Text 180

paropahäsam uddiçya

kärttike hari-sevayä

mathuräyäà labhed bhaktià

kià punaù çraddhayä naraù

para-upahäsam uddiçya-as a joke; kärttike-in Kärttika; hari-sevayä-with service to Lord Hari; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; labhed-attain; bhaktim-devotion; kim-what?; punaù-again; çraddhayä-with faith; naraù-a person.

 

They who as a joke serve Lord Hari during Kärttika in Mathura' will attain pure devotional service, what to speak of they who serve the Lord with faith and devotion.

 

Text 181

 

tatraiva dhümrakeçaà prati yama-väkyam

tasmän nåpätmaja çreyaù

paraà kiïcin na-not; vidyate

kärttike mathuräyäà ca

çré-dämodara-püjanät

tatra-there; eva-indeed; dhümrakeçam- prati-to Dhumrakeça; yama-väkyam-words of Yama; tasmät-from this; nåpätmaja-O prince; çreyaù param-better; kiïcit-something; na-not; vidyate-is; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; çré-dämodara-of Lord Dämodara; püjanät-than worship.

 

In the same scripture Yamaräja says to Dhumrakeça:

Therefore, O prince, nothing is better than to serve Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika.

 

Text 182

 

na cätra saàçayaù karyaù

éçitåtvaà idaà hareù

räjä hi kasyacid dhåtvä

sarvasvaà cet prayacchati

parasmai kasya kas tatra

niyantä syät prabhor yathä

na-not; ca-and; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt; karyaù-to be done; éçitåtvam-power; idam-this; hareù-of Kåñëa; räjä-king; hi-indeed; kasyacid-of someone; dhåtva-holding; sarvasvam-everything; cet-if; prayacchati-gives; parasmai-to another; kasya-of whom?; kaù-who?; tatra-there; niyantä-controller; syät-is; prabhor-the Lord; yathä-as.

 

Of this there is no doubt. This is the power of Lord Hari. He can take everything from one person and He can give everything to another. Who is a controller as powerful as Lord Hari?

 

Text 183

 

ayaà sarveçvaraù çrémän

anyathä kartum éçvaraù

aty-alpaà bhuri kurute

bahu tucchaà ca manyate

ayam-He; sarveçvaraù-the Lord of all; çrémän-master of opulences; anyathä-otherwise; kartum-to do; éçvaraù-able; aty-alpam-tiny; bhuri-great; kurute-makes; bahu-great; tuccham-insignificant; ca-and; manyate-is considered.

 

He is the supremely opulent controller of all. He has the power to change anything. He can make the very small great and He can make the great insignificant.

 

Text 184

 

taträpi prabodhinyäm ati-viçeñah. pädme kärttika-mähätmye.

tävad garjanti térthäni

väjimedhädayo makhaù

mathuräyäà priyä viñëor

yävan nayati bodhiné

tatra-there; api-also; prabodhinyäm-on Prabodhini» ati-viçeñah-specificaly; pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mahatmya; tävad-then; garjanti-thunders; térthäni-holy places; väjimedhädayaù-beginning with açvamedha sacrifices; makhaù-sacrifices; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; priyä-dear; viñëor-of Kåñëa; yävan-when; nayati-leads; bodhiné-awakening.

 

Residence in Mathura' During Prabodhini tithi

In the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:

When Lord Viñëu does not wake from His happy sleep on Prabodhiné tithi, then all the holy places roar with açvamedha-yajïas.

 

Note: Prabodhiné tithi is the first ekädaçé in the month of Kärttika. On that day the Lord awakens from His four-month-long nap.

Text 185

 

saàsära-dava-taptänäà

käma-saukhya-pipäsinäm

çré-kåñëa-päda-padmasya

sännidhyaà çétalaà gåham

saàsära-of birth and death; dava-by the forest fire; taptänäm-burned; käma-of lust; saukhya-the pleasures; pipäsinäm-thirsty; çré-kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; päda-padmasya-of the lotus feet; sännidhyam-nearness; çétalam-cool; gåham-home.

 

Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet are a cooling shelter for they who thirst after material happiness but find themselves burned by the forest-fire of repeated birth and death.

 

Text 186

 

mathuräyäà tu kià väcyaà

jägare hari-sannidhau

kärttike bodhinéà präpya

tataù çreyaù paraà hi na

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; kim-what?; väcyam-can be said; jägare-in the awakening; hari-sannidhau-near Lord Hari; kärttike-in Kärttika; bodhiném-Prabodhini; präpya-attaining; tataù-than that; çreyaù param-better» hi-indeed; na-not.

 

What can be said about approaching the Deity of Lord Hari when He awakens in Mathurä? No day is better than the Prabodhiné day in the month of Kärttika.

 

Text 187

 

räjyam anyatra santyajya

sphétaà nihata-kaëöakam

kärttike mathuräyäà vai

kaimutyaà jägaraà caret

räjyam-kingdom; anyatra-in another place; santyajya-abandoning; sphétam-great; nihata-kaëöakam-without disturbance; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; kaimutyam-what is better?; jägaram-awake; caret-may do.

 

One should leave any other great and peaceful kingdom, and in Mathura' stay awake through the night during Prabodhini in the month of Kärttika. What place is better than Mathura' for this?

 

Text 188

atha dvädaçyäm. viñëu-puräëe

ürjasya çukla-dvädaçyäà

snätvä vai yamunä-jale

mathuräyäà harià dåñövä

präpnoti paramäà gatim

atha-now; dvädaçyäm-during dvädaçé; viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; ürjasya-of karttika; çukla-dvädaçyäm-on çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; vai-indeed; yamunä-jale-in the water of the Yamunä; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti-attains; paramäm-supreme; gatim-destination.

 

Residing in Mathura' During Dvädaçé

In the Viñëu Puräëa it is said:

A person who during the Çukla-dvädaçé in the month of Kärttika bathes in the Yamunä and sees the Deity of Lord Hari in Mathura' attains the supreme destination.

 

Text 189

 

atha bhéñma-païcake. padme bhéñmaà prati çré-kåñëa-vacanam

tvayä kåte vrate päçcät

khyäsyate bhéñma-païcakam

ye tatra janma-bhümau me

kariñyanti mahä-vratam

mathuräyäà tu gäìgeya

teñäà bhaktiù kare sthitä

atha-now; bhéñma-païcake-in Bhisma-pancaka; padme-in the Padma Puräëa; bhéñmam- prati-to Bhisma; çré-kåñëa-vacanam-Kåñëa's words; tvayä-by you; kåte-done; vrate-vow; päçcät-after; khyäsyate-will be known; bhéñma-païcakam-as Bhisma-pancaka; ye-who; tatra-there; janma-bhümau'in the birthplace; me-My; kariñyanti-will do; mahä-vratam-great vow; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; gäìgeya-O Bhisma; teñäm-of them; bhaktiù-devotion; kare-in the hand; sthitä-standing.

 

Residing in Mathura' During Bhéñma-païcaka

In the Padma Puräëa, Çri Kåñëa says to Bhéñma:

O Gäìgeya, this vow you have followed will henceforth be known as Bhéñma-païcaka. They who follow this great vow in My birthplace, Mathurä, find pure devotional service resting in their hand.

 

Text 190

särvabhaumas tö indra-padaà

brahmalokas tathäkñayam

yoga-siddhià ca muktià ca

préto yacchämi sarvaçaù

särvabhaumaùroyal power; tu-indeed; indra-padam-the post of Indra; brahmalokaù-Brahmaloka; tathä-so; akñayam-immortal; yoga-siddhim-mysté power; ca-and; muktim-liberation; ca-and; prétaù-pleased; yacchämi-I give; sarvaçaù-completely.

 

Being perfectly pleased with him, I give him royal power, the post of Indra, residence in immortal Brahmaloka, yogé powers, and liberation.

 

Text 191

 

durlabho bhakti-yogo me

mama vaçya-vidhäyakaù

kärttike mathuräyäà ca

vratenänena labhyate

durlabhaù-difficult to attain; bhakti-yogaù-bhakti-yoga; me-of Me; mama-My; vaçya-vidhäyakaù-brings under the dominion; kärttike-in karttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; vratena-vow; anena-by this; labhyate-is attained.

 

Pure devotional service to Me which, becausae it places Me under My devotee's dominion, is very difficult to attain, is easily attained by following this vow in Mathura' during Kärttika.

 

Text 192

 

puräëäntare ca

sarväbhiñöa-pradaà proktaà

mäthure bhéñma-païcakam

puräëa-antare-in another Puräëa; ca-and; sarva-all; abhiñöa-desires; pradam-granting; proktam-said; mäthure-in Mathurä; bhéñma-païcakam-Bhisma-pancaka.

 

In another place in the Puräëas it is said:

Following the vow of Bhéñma-païcaka in Mathura' is said to fulfill all desires.

 

Text 193

 

yathä bhaviñye

bhéñma-païca-dine präpte

mathurä-maëòale hareù

nidrä-ccheda-kare puëye

päduke cävalokayet

yathä-as; bhaviñye-in the Bhaviñya Puräëa; bhéñma-païca-dine präpte-on the day of Bhisma-pancaka; mathurä-maëòale-in Mathurä; hareù-of Kåñëa; nidrä-ccheda-kare-awakening from sleep; puëye-sacred; päduke-sandals; ca-and; avalokayet-may see.

 

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa it is said:

A person who observes Bhiñma-païcaka and Prabodhiné tithi in Mathura' will see Lord Hari's splendid sandals.

 

Text 194

 

atha mathurä-vanäntargata-madhupuré-mähätmyam. skände mathurä-khaëòe

madhor vanaà prathamato

yatra vai mathurä-puré

madhu-daityo hato yatra

hariëä viçva-mürtiëä

atha-now; mathurä-vana-Mathura' Forest; antargata-within; madhupuré-Mathura' City; mähätmyam-glorification; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathurä-khaëòe'Mathurä-khaëòa; madhor vanam-Madhuvana; prathamataù-first; yatra-where; vai-indeed; mathurä-puré-Mathura' City; madhu-daityaù-the demon Madhu; hataù-killed; yatra-where; hariëä-by Lord Kåñëa; viçva-mürtiëä-the form of the universe.

 

Glorification of Mathurä City in Mathura' Forest

In the Skända Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

First is Madhuvana, where is Mathura' City, where Lord Hari, who appears as the Universal Form, killed the Madhu demon.

 

Text 195

 

tatraiva bhagavad-väsa

ävirbhävo harer nåpa

viçramaç ca hares tatra-there;

devänäà ca nåpottama

tatra-there; eva-indeed; bhagavad-of the Lord; väse-in the residence; ävirbhävaù-appearance; harer-of Lord Kåñëa; nåpa-O king» viçramaù-pastimes; ca-and; hareù-of Lord Hari; tatra-there; devänäm-of the demigods; ca-and; nåpottama-O great king.

 

There the Supreme Personality of Godhead resides. O king, there Lord Hari appeared. O great king, there Lord Hari and the demigods enjoyed pastimes.

 

Text 196

 

yo vai madhuvane snäti

yamunä-jalaà açrétaù

sarva-tértheñu sa snätas

tat-phalaà labhate dhruvam

yaù-who; vai-indeed; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; snäti-bathes; yamunä-jalam-in the Yamunä's waters; açrétaù'sheltered; sarva-tértheñu-in all holy places; sah-he; snätaùhas bathed; tat-phalam-result; labhate'attains; dhruvam-indeed.

 

A person who bathes in the waters of the Yamuna in Madhuvana attains the result of bathing in all holy places.

 

Text 197

 

sarveñäà nåpa siddhiù syät

tasmin madhuvane nåëäm

tapasä bhakti-yogena

snäna-mätreëa karmaëä

sarveñäm-of al; nåpa-O king; siddhiù-perfection; syät-is; tasmin-there; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; nåëäm-of people; tapasä-with austerity; bhakti-yogena-bhakti-yoga; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; karmaëä-by the activity.

 

O king, a person who performs the devotional austerity of merely bathing in Madhuvana attains all perfections.

 

Text 198

 

aho madhuvanaà dhanyaà

yatra rämaù sahänujaù

karoti karma lokänäà

hitäya ca manéñinäm

ahaù-Oh; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; dhanyam-opulent; yatra-where; rämaù-Balaräma; saha-with; anujaù-His younger brother; karoti-does; karma-action; lokänäm-of the worlds; hitäya-for the benefit; ca-and; manéñinäm-thoughtful.

Madhuvana, where Balaräma and His younger brother performed actions for the benefit of thoughtful men, . . .

Text 199

 

mardito yatra kåñëena

cograsenätmajo 'suraù

pävitaù sparça-mätreëa

gatià nétaç ca yoginäm

marditaù-killed; yatra-where; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; ca-and; ugrasena-Ugrasena's; ätmajaù-son;û asuraù-demon; pävitaù-purified; sparça-mätreëa-simply by a touch; gatim-destination; nétaù-brought; ca-and; yoginäm-of the yogis.

 

. . .and where Kåñëa killed Ugrasena's demon son, purified him with a mere touch, and gave him the desination attained by the yogés, is filled with transcendental opulence.

 

Text 200

 

tasmin madhuvane räjan

durghataà kià hari-priye

vaktuà nämäni térthänäà

çakyante na mayädhunä

tasmin madhuvane yäni

mähätmyaà ca nåpottama

tasmin-there; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; räjan-O king; durghatam-difficult to attain; kim-what?; hari-priye'dear to Lord Hari; vaktum-to say; nämäni-names; térthänäm-holy places; çakyante-are able; na-not; mayä-by me; adhunä-now; tasmin-in this; madhuvane-Madhuvana; yäni-which; mähätmyam-glorification;- ca-and; nåpottama-O great king.

 

O king, what is difficult to attain in Madhuvana, which is so dear to Lord Hari? O great king, I do not now have the power to name Madhuvana's forests and describe their glories.

 

Text 201

 

aho madhuvanaà dåñöaà

çrutaà vä tat su-sevinäm

sthitaà vä yaiù suraöitaà

dhanyäs te bhuvi mänaväù

ahaù-Oh; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; dåñöam-seen; çrutam-heard; vä-or; tat-that; su-sevinäm-of the servants; sthitam-situation; vä-or; yaiù-by whom; suraöitam-glorified; dhanyäù-fortunate; te-they; bhuvi-on the earth; mänaväù-people.

They who see, hear about, serve, reside in, and glorify Madhuvana, are fortunate in this world.

 

Text 202

 

evaà pradakñiëaà kåtvä

navaméà çukla-kaumudém

sarvän kulän samädäya

viñëuloke mahéyate

evam-in this way; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; kåtvä-doing; navamém-the ninth day; çukla-kaumudém-the âright moon; sarvän-all; kulän-relatives; samädäya-taking; viñëuloke-on Viñëuloka; mahéyate-glorified.

 

A person who circumambulates Madhuvana on the ninth day of the bright moon during Kärttika, is glorified in Viñëuloka with all his relatives.

 

Text 203

 

kramataù pada-vinyäsä

yävantaù sarvato diçaù

tävantaù kula-sambhütaù

svarge tiñöhänti çäçvataù

kramataù-gradually; pada-vinyäsä-placing his steps; yävantaù-as; sarvataù-in all; diçaù-directions; tävantaù-so; kula-sambhütaù-with his family; svarge-in the spiritual world; tiñöhänti-stays; çäçvataù-eternally.

 

When a person wanders in Madhuvana, placing his steps in every direction, he finds himself eternally residing in the spiritual world with his family.

 

Text 204

 

anya-deça-gato dürät

parikramati yo naraù

tasya sandarçanäd eva

pütäù syur gata-kalmañäù

anya-another; deça-country; gataù-gone; dürät-from far away; parikramati-circumambulates; yaù-who; naraù-a person; tasya-of him; sandarçanäd'from the sight; eva-indeed; pütäù-purified; syur-become; gata-gone; kalmañäù-sins.

 

The sight of a person who comes from another country far away and circumambulates Mathurä, purifies the people and chases away their sins.

Text 205

 

çruto yais tu vidüra-sthaiù

kåta-yatro naro naraiù

sarva-päpa-vinirmuktäs

te 'pi yänti paräà gatim

çrutaù-heard; yaiù-by whom; tu-indeed; vidüra-sthaiù-far away; kåta-yätraù-journeyed; naraù-a person; naraiù'with people; sarva-all; päpa-sins; vinirmuktäùfreed; te-they; api-also; yänti-attain; paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.

 

They who hear about others who come from far away to visit Madhuvana become free from all sins and go to the supreme destination.

 

Text 206

 

mathuräyäà naro gatvä

dåñövä devaà svayambhuvam

pradakñiëäyäà yat puëyaà

tat puëyaà labhate hi saù

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; naraù-a person; gatvä-having gone; dåñövä-having seen; devam-Lord; svayambhuvam-Svayambü; pradakñiëäyäm-in circumambulating; yat puëyam-what piety; tat puëyam-that piety; labhate-attains; hi-indeed; saù-he.

 

A person who goes to Mathura' and sees the Deity of Lord Svayambhü attains the piety of circumambulating Madhuvana.

Text 207

 

atha janma-sthäna-mähätmyam. skände

japopaväsa-nirato

mathuräyäà ñaòänana

janma-sthänaà samäsädya

sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

atha-now; janma-birth; sthäna-place; mähätmyam-glorification; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; japa-japa; upaväsa-and fasting; nirataù-engaged; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ñaòänana-O Karttikeya; janma-sthänam-birthplace; samäsädya-attaining; sarva-päpaiù-from all sins; pramucyate-freed.

 

The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace

In the Skända Puräëa it is said:

O Kärttikeya, a person who fasts and chants japa at the Lord's birthplace becomes free from all sins.

 

Text 208

 

atha kärttike. pädme

kärttike janma-sadane

keçavasya ca ye naräù

sakåt praviñöäù çré-kåñëaà

te yänti param avyayam

atha-now; kärttike-during Kärttika; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; kärttike-in Kärttika; janma-sadane-at the birth-chamber; keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; ca-and; ye-who; naräù-pewrsons; sakåt-once; praviñöäù-entered; çré-kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; te-they; yänti-attain; param avyayam-eternal abode.

 

The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace During the Month of Kärttika

In the Padma Puräëa it is said:

They who once enter Lord Keçava's birth-chamber during the month of Kärttika go to eternal Lord Kåñëa.

 

Text 209

 

tatraiva prabodhanyäm

ekaivaikädaçé kåñëa-

janma-gehe kåtä naraiù

tato 'dhikaà prakartavyaà

loke kiïcin na vidyate

tatra-there; eva-indeed; prabodhanyäm-on Prabodhini; eka-one; eva-indeed; ekädaçé-ekädaçé; kåñëa-janma-gehe-Kåñëa's birth-chamber; kåtä-done; naraiù-by people; tataù-than that; adhikam-greater; prakartavyam-to be done; loke-in the world; kiïcit-something; na-not; vidyate-is.

 

 

The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace During the Prabodhiné Day Are Described in the Same Scripture:

In this world nothing is better than to observe Pabodhiné in Lord Kåñëa's birth-chamber.

 

Text 210

 

rätrau jägaraëaà taträ prétyä kurvanti ye naräù

saàsära-moha-sväpnänte

sadä jägrati jägrati

rätrau-at night; jägaraëam-staying awake; tatra-there; prétyä-with happiness; kurvanti-do; ye-who; naräù-people; saàsära-moha-sväpnänte-at the end of the bewildering sleep of repeated birth and death; sadä'always; jägrati jägrati-awaken.

 

They who happily remain awake during that night awaken from the bewildering sleep of repeated birth and death.

 

Text 211

 

anyaträpi priyä viñëor

jägare syät prabodhiné

kià punar mathuräyäà sä

tato vai janma-sadmani

anyatra-in another place; api-also; priyä-dear; viñëor-to Kåñëa; jägare-staying awake; syät-is; prabodhiné-Prabodhini; kim-how much?; punar-more; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sä-that; tataù-therefore; vai'indeed; janma-sadmani-birth-chamber.

 

Staying awake in any place during Prabodhiné pleases Lord Viñëu, what to speak of staying awake in Lord Kåñëa's birth chamber in Mathurä.

 

Text 212

 

atha çré-keçavasya mähätmyam. ädi-värähe

pradakñiëé-kåtä tena

sapta-dvépä vasundharä

pradakñini-kåto yena

mathuräyäà tu keçavaù

atha-now; çré-keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; mähätmyam-glorification;. ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; pradakñiëé-kåtä-circumambulated; tena-by him; sapta-dvépä-seven continents; vasundharä-earth; pradakñini-kåtaù-circumambulated; yena-by whom; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; keçavaù-Keçava.

 

The Glories of the Deity of Çré Keçava

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

A person who circumambulates the Deity of Çré Keçava in Mathura' circumambulates the the seven continents of the earth.

Text 213

 

iha janma-kåtaà päpam

anya-janma-kåtaà ca yat

tat sarvaà naçyate çéghraà

kértane keçavasya ca

iha-here; janma-in this birth; kåtam-done; päpam-sin; anya-in another; janma-birth; kåtam-done; ca-and; yat-what; tat-that; sarvam-all; naçyate-perishes; çéghram-quickly; kértane-in the glorification; keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; ca-and.

 

Sins performed in this birth and other births are at once destroyed when one glorifies the Deity of Lord Keçava.

 

Text 214

 

tatraiva suptotthita-keçavasya darçana-phalam

suptotthitaà harià dåñövä

mathuräyäà vasundhare

na tasya punar ävåttir

jäyate sa catur-bhujaù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; supta-utthita-risen from sleep; keçavasya-of Keçava; darçana-sight; phalam'result; supta-utthitam-risen from sleep; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vasundhare-O earth; na-not; tasya-of him; punar-again; ävåttir-return; jäyate-is born; sah-he; catur-bhujaù-four-armed;

 

In the Same Scripture the Result of Seeing Lord Keçava Awaken From Sleep Is Described

O earth-goddess, a person who sees Lord Keçava awaken from sleep in Mathura' does not take birth again in this world. He is born again as a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.

 

Text 215

 

pädme kärttika-mähätmye

suptam utthäpya govindaà

tan mukhaà sütikä-gåhe

paçyanti kåta-puëyä ye

teñäà kià bhägyam ucyate

pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mahatmya; suptam-sleep; utthäpya-awakening; govindam-Govinda; tat-that; mukham-face; sütikä-gåhe-in the birth-chamber; paçyanti-see; kåta-puëyä-piety; ye-who; teñäm-of them; kim-how?; bhägyam-good fortune; ucyate-is said.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:

How can the good fortune of the pious persons who see Lord Govinda awaken from sleep in His birth-chamber be described?

 

Text 216

 

viñëu-puräëe ñañöhe 'mçe

ürjasya çukla-dvädaçyäà

snätvä vai yamunä-jale

mathuräyäà harià dåñövä

präpnoti paramäà gatim

viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; sasthe aàçe-in the Sixth Canto; ürjasya-of Kärttika; çukla-dvädaçyäm-on çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; vai-indeed; yamunä-jale-in the Yamunä's water; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti'attains; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.

 

In the Viñëu Puräëa, Canto Six, it is said:

A person who on the çukla-dvädaçé of Kärttika bathes in the Yamunä's waters and then sees the Deity of Lord Hari in Mathurä, attains the supreme destination.

 

Text 217

 

atha çré-bhagavan-mürténäà mähätmyam. ädi-värähe

dérgha-viñëuà samälokya

padmanäbhaà svayambhuvam

mathuräyäà sakåd devi

sarväbhéñöam aväpnuyät

atha-now; çré-bhagavat-of the Lord; mürténäm-of the Deities; mähätmyam-glorification; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; dérgha-viñëum-Dérgha Viñëu; samälokya-seeing; padmanäbham-Padmanäbha; svayambhuvam-Svayambhü; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sakåd'once; devi-O goddess; sarva-all; abhiñöam-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.

 

Glorification of the Deity Forms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O goddess, a person who once sees the Deities of Lord Dérgha-Viñëu, Lord Padmanäbha, and Lord Svayambhü, in Mathurä, attains all his desires.

Text 218

 

tathä

viçränti-saàjïakaà dåñövä

dérgha-viñëuà ca keçavam

sarveñäà darçanät puëyam

ebhir dåñöaiù phalaà labhet

tathä-so; viçränti-saàjïakam-named Viçränti; dåñövä-having seen; dérgha-viñëum-Dirgha Vis„ëu; ca-and; keçavam-Keçava; sarveñäm-of all; darçanät-from the sight; puëyam-piety; ebhir-by them; dåñöaiù-seen; phalam-result; labhet-attains.

 

It is also said:

They who see the Deities of Lord Dérgha-Viñëu and Lord Keçava at Viçränti-tértha attain the pious result of seeing all other Deities.

 

Text 219

 

udaye mämakaà tejaù

sadä viçränti-saàjïake

madhyähne mämakaà tejo

dérgha-viñëau vyavasthitam

keçave mämakaà tejo

dina-bhäge caturthake

udaye-at sunrise; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; sadä-always; viçränti-saàjïake-at Viçränti; madhyähne'at midday; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; dérgha-viñëau-in Dérgha Viñëu; vyavasthitam-placed; keçave-in Keçava; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; dina-bhäge caturthake-at the fourth portion of the day.

 

At sunrise My splendor rests in Viçränti-tértha. At midday My splendor rests in the Deity of Lord Dérgha-Viñëu. In the evening My splendor rests in the Deity of Lord Keçava.

 

Text 220

 

atha çré-kåñëa-pariväräëäm

ekänaàçäà tato devéà

yaçodäà devakéà tadä

mahä-vidyeçvaréà dåñövä

mucyate brahma-hatyayä

atha-now; çré-kåñëa-pariväräëäm-of Lord Kåñëa's associates; ekänaàçäm-Ekanamsa-devi; tato-then; devém-devi; yaçodäm-Yaçodä; devakém-Devaké; tadä-then; mahä-vidyeçvarém-Maha'-Vidyeçvaré; dåñövä-having seen; mucyate-becomes free; brahma-hatyayä-from the sin opf killing a Brahmana.

 

The Glorification of Çré Kåñëa's Associates

A person who sees Ekänaàça'-devé, Yaçodä, Devaké, or Maha'-Vidyeçvaré-devé, becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

 

Text 221

 

atha bhüteçvarasya

mathuräyäà ca deva tvaà

kñetra-palo bhaviñyasi

tvayi dåñöe mahä-deva

mama kñetra-phalaà labhet

atha-now; bhüteçvarasya-of Lord Bhüteçvara; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; deva-O Lord; tvam-you; kñetra-of the place; pälaù-protector; bhaviñyasi-are; tvayi-in you; dåñöe-seen; mahä-deva'O Mahädeva; mama-My; kñetra-of the place;phalam-result; labhet-attains.

 

The Glorification of the Deity Lord Bhüteçvara (Çiva)

O Deva, you will be the protector of Mathurä. O Mahädeva, a person who sees you will attain the result of seeing My own abode.

 

Text 222

 

nirväëa-khaëòe

yatra bhüteçvaro devo

mokñadaù päpinäm api

mama priyatamo nityaà

deva bhüteçvaraù paraù

nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvän„-khaëòa; yatra-where; bhüteçvaraù-Bhutesvara; devaù-Lord; mokñadaù-giver of liberation; päpinäm-of the sinful; api-even; mama-My; priyatamaù-most dear; nityam-always; deva'O deva; bhüteçvaraù-Bhutesvara; paraù-supreme.

 

In the Nirväëa-khaëòa it is said:

In Mathura' is the deity Lord Bhuteçvara, who grants liberation to even the sinful. This Bhuteçvara deity is very dear to Me.

 

Text 223

kathaà vä mayi bhaktià sa

labhate päpa-püruñaù

yo madéyaà paraà bhaktaà

çivaà sampüjayen na hi

katham-how?; vä-or; mayi-for me; bhaktim-devotion; sah-he; labhate-attains; päpa-püruñaù'sinful person; yaù-who; madéyam-My; param- bhaktam-supreme devotion; çivam-Çiva; sampüjayet'may worship; na-not; hi-indeed.

 

How can a sinful person who tries to worship Me but will not worship Bhüteçvara Çiva attain devotion to Me?

 

Text 224

 

man-mäyä-mohita-dhiyaù

präyas te mänavädhamäù

bhüteçvaraà na smaranti

na namanti stuvanti vä

mat-My; mäyä-Maya; mohita-bewildered; dhiyaù-intelligence; präyaù-mostly; te-they; mänavädhamäù-the lowest of men; bhüteçvaram-Bhutesvara; na-not; smaranti-remember; na-not; namanti-offer obeisances; stuvanti-offer prayers; vä-or.

 

The lowest of men, who are bewildered by My mäyä, will not meditate on, bow down before, and offer prayers to Lord Bhüteçvara.

 

Text 225

 

atha viçränti-mähätmyam. skände

tatra térthaà mahäräja

viçränti-loka-viçrutam

bhramitvä sarva-térthäni

viçräntià yänti sattvatäù

atha-now; viçränti-of Viçränti; mähätmyam-glorification;. skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; tértham-holy place; mahäräja-O king; viçränti-Viçränti; loka-in the world; viçrutam-famous; bhramitvä-having wandered; sarva-térthäni-to all holy places; viçräntim-to Viçränti-tértha; yänti-attain; sattvatäù-the devotees.

 

The Glorification of Viçränti-tértha

In the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

O great king, this holy place is famous in the world as Viçränti-tértha. After traveling to all holy places, the saintly devotees rest in Viçränti-tértha.

 

Text 226

 

tatraiva badaré-mähätmye

viçränti-térthe vidhivat

snätvä kåtvä tilodakam

pitån uddhåtya narakäd

viñëulokaà prapadyate

tatra-there; eva-indeed; badaré-of badari-tértha; mähätmye-in the glorification; viçränti-térthe-in Viçränti-tértha; vidhivat-following the rules; snätvä-having bathed; kåtvä-having done; tila-sesame; udakam-and water; pitån-to the pitäs; uddhåtya-lifting; narakäd-from hell; viñëulokam-Viñëuloks; prapadyate-atain.

 

In the same scripture, in the Badaré-mähätmya, it is said:

A person who, following the rules of the scriptures, bathes at Viçränti-tértha and makes an offering of sesame seeds and water, lifts his ancestors from hell and makes them enter Viñëuloka.

 

Text 227

 

yadi kuryät pramädena

pätakaà tatra mänaväù

viçränti-snäna-mätreëa

bhasmé-bhavati tat-kñaëät

yadi-if; kuryät-does; pramädena-out of foolishness; pätakam-sin; tatra-there; mänaväù-people; viçränti-at Viçränti-tértha; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; bhasmé-bhavati-becomes ashes; tat-kñaëät-at that moment.

 

If a person foolishly commits a sin, by his simply bathing at Viçränti-tértha the sin will be at once burned to ashes.

 

Text 228

 

saura-puräëe

*tato viçränti-térthäkhyaà

tértham aìgho-vinäçanam

saàsära-maru-saïcära-

kleça-viçränti-daà nåëäm

saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; viçränti-térthäkhyam-Viçränti-tértha; tértham-holy place; aìghaù-sins; vinäçanam-destruction; saàsära-of birth and death; maru-in the desert; saïcära-wandering; kleça-suffering; viçränti-dam-giving rest; nåëäm-to people.

 

In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

The holy place named Viçränti-tértha destroys sins and gives rest from the pain of wandering in the desert of birth and death.

 

Text 229

 

tatra térthe kåta-snäno

yo 'rcayed acyutaà naram

sa mukto bhava-santäpäd

amåtatväya kalpate

tatra-there; térthe-in the holy place; kåta-snänaù-bathed; yaù-one who; arcayed-worships; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; naram-person; sah-he; muktaù-liberated; bhava-santäpäd-from the sufferings of material existence; amåtatväya'for immortality; kalpate-becomes qualified.

 

A person who, bathing at this holy place, worships Lord Acyuta, becomes free from the sufferings of repeated birth and death and qualified for liberation.

 

Text 230

 

pädme yamunä-mähätmye

kalinda-parvatodbhede

mathuräyäà tathä puré

pratyaì-mukhyaà ca çaukaryäà

bhägérathyäç ca saìgame

pädme yamunä-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Yamuna'-mahatmya; kalinda-parvata-udbhede-from Mount Kalinda; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tathä-so; puré-the city; pratyan--mukhyam-turning; ca-and; çaukaryäm-to varäha-tértha; bhägérathyäù-with the Ganges; ca-and; saìgame-in meeting.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Yamunä-mähätmya, it is said:

Flowing from Mount Kalinda to Mathura' City, and then west to Ädi-varäha-tértha, the Yamuna' eventually meets the Ganges.

 

Text 231

 

phalaà uttara-küloktaà

tat-kälindyäà çatädhikamtad eva koöi-guëitaà

viçräntau kathyate budhaiù

phalam-result; uttara-küla-northern shore; uktam-said; tat-kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; çata-adhikam-a hundred times greater; tad-that; eva-indeed; koöi-guëitam-millions of times more; viçräntau-at Viçränti; kathyate-is said; budhaiù-by the wise.

 

The wise say the pious result of bathing in the Yamuna' is a hundred times greater on its northern shore and millions of times greater at Viçränti-tértha.

 

Text 232

 

ädi-värähe

viçränti-saàjïakaà näma

térthaà trailokya-durlabham

yasmin snäto naro devi

mama loke mahéyate

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; viçränti-saàjïakam- näma tértham-Viçränti-tértha; trailokya-in the three worlds; durlabham-rare; yasmin-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O goddess, a person who bathes in the holy place named Viçränti-tértha, which is difficult to attain in the three worlds, is glorified in My own abode.

 

Text 233

 

gaìgä-çata-guëaà proktaà

yatra keçi-nipätitaù

keçyäù çata-guëaà proktaà

yatra viçräntito hariù

gaìgä-the Ganges; çata-guëam-multiplied 100 times; proktam- yatra-where; keçi-Keçé; nipätitaù-died; keçyäù-than Kesi-tértha; çata-guëam-a hundred times more; proktam-said; yatra-where; viçräntitaù-rested; hariù-Kåñëa.

 

The place where Keçé was killed is said to be a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges. The place where Lord Hari rested is said to be a hundred times more sacred than Keçi-tértha.

 

Text 234

tathä

ardha-candräd viçeño 'sti

térthe viçränti-saàjïake

dähädi-karaëe tatra

gardhabho 'pi catur-bhüjaù

tathä-so; ardha-candräd-from Ardhacandra-tértha; viçeñaù-specific; asti-is; térthe viçränti-saàjïake-in Viçränti-tértha; daha-ädi-beginning with a forest-fire; karaëe-cause; tatra-there; gardhabhaù-an ass; api-even; catur-bhüjaù-four arms.

 

It is also said:

Near Ardhacandra-tértha is Viçränti-tértha, where there was a forest-fire and where an ass-demon became a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.

 

Text 235

 

väsudevo vasen nityaà

tasmin sthäne nåpottama

viçräntià kurute yena

tena viçränti-saàjïakam

väsudevaù-Lord Väsudeva; vaset-lives; nityam-eternaly; tasmin sthäne-in that place; nåpottama'O great king; viçräntim-rest; kurute-does; yena-by whom; tena-by Him; viçränti-saàjïakam-named Viçränti-tértha.

 

O king, Lord Väsudeva resides eternally in this place. He rested (viçram, here and therefore this place is named Viçränti-tértha.

 

Text 236

 

puräëäntare 'pi

kalpa-koöi-çatenäpi

viçräntau roma-romasu

kñaura-karmaëi dähe ca

punar-janma na vidyate

puräëa-antare-in another Puräëa; api-also; kalpa-koöi-çatena-hundreds of millions of kalpas; api-even; viçräntau-in Viçränti; roma-romasu-in the hair; kñaura-karmaëi-shaving; dähe-in a fire; ca-and; punar-janma-birth again; na-not; vidyate-is.

 

In another Puräëa it is said:

Shaving one's head at Viçränti-tértha is a great fire in which hundreds of millions of kalpas of future births perish.

 

Text 237

 

atha gataçramadeva-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe

sarva-tértheñu yat snänaà

sarva-tértheñu yat phalam

tat phalaà labhate devi

dåñövä devaà gataçramam

atha-now; gataçramadeva-of Lord Gataçrama; mähätmyam-glorification; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; sarva-all; tértheñu-in holy places; yat-what; snänam-bath; sarva-tértheñu-in all holy places; yat-what; phalam-result; tat-that; phalam-result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; dåñövä-having seen; devam- gataçramam-Lord Gataçrama.

 

The Glorification of Gataçramadeva

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O goddess, the pious result of bathing at all holy places is attained by seeing the Deity of Lord Gataçrama.

 

Text 238

 

käla-trayaà tu vasudhe

yaù paçyati gataçramam

kåtvä pradakñiëaà bhéru

viñëulokaà sa gacchati

käla-trayam-three times; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; yaù-who; paçyati-sees; gataçramam-Gataçrama; kåtvä pradakñiëam-circumambulating; bhéru-with reverence; viñëulokam-Viñëuloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

O earth-goddess, a person who sees Lord Gataçrama three times (morning, noon, and night, a day and circumambulates Him with awe and veneration, goes to Viñëuloka.

 

Text 239

 

athärdhacandra-sthitäni yamunä-térthäni catur-viàçatiù. ädi-värähe

avimukto naraù snätvä

muktià präpnoty asaàçayam

taträtha muïcati präëän

mama lokaà sa gacchaté

atha-now; ardhacandra-at Ardhacandra; sthitäni-situated; yamunä-on the Yamunä; térthäni-holy places; catur-viàçatiù-24; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; avimuktaù-not liberated; naraù-a person; snätvä-having bathed; muktim-liberation; präpnoti-attains; asaàçayam-no doubt; tatra-there; atha-then; muïcati-gives up; präëän-life breath; mama-My; lokam-planet; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

Glorification of 24 Holy Places at Ardhacandra on the Yamunä's Shore

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

A person who bathes there attains liberation without doubt. A person who dies there goes to My planet.

 

Text 240

 

viçränti-saàjïakaà näma

térthaà trailokya-viçrutam

yasmin snätvä naro devi

mama loke mahéyate

viçränti-saàjïakam- näma tértham-Viçränti-tértha; trailokya-viçrutam-famous in the three worlds; yasmin-where; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

This holy place is famous in the three worlds as Viçränti-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes here is glorified in My abode.

 

Text 241

 

asti cänyataraà guhyaà

sarva-saàsära-mokñaëam

tasmin snäto naro devi

mama loke mahéyate

asti-is; ca-and; anyataram-another; guhyam-Guhya; sarva-saàsära-mokñaëam-liberation from birth and death; tasmin-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

Guhya-tértha, which gives liberation from the cycle of birth and death, is another holy place. O goddess, a person who bathes there is glorified in My abode.

 

Text 242

prayägaà näma térthaà tu

devänäà api durlabham

yasmin snäto naro devi

agniñöoma-phalaà labhet

prayägam- näma tértham-Prayäga-tértha; tu-indeed; devänäm-for the demigods; api-even; durlabham-difficult to attain; yasmin-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; agniñöoma-of an agnistoma-yajna; phalam-result; labhet-attains;

 

The holy place named Prayäga-tértha is difficult for even to the demigods to attain. O goddess, a person who bathes there attains the result of performing an agniñöoma-yajïa.

 

Text 243

 

saura-puräëe

tatas térthaà prayägäkhyaà

pavitraà päpa-näçanam

pitåbhyas tatra yad dattaà

tad akñayataraà bhavet

saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; tértham- prayägäkhyam-Prayäga-tértha; pavitram-pure; päpa-näçanam-destroying sin; pitåbhyaù-to the pitäs; tatra-there; yad-what; dattam-offered; tad-that;û akñayataram-immortality; bhavet-is.

 

In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

Next is the holy place named Prayäga-tértha, which destroys sins and is very pure. Ancestors who receive offerings there become immortal.

 

Text 244

 

tat térthaà sevamänasya

kåñëaà ca jagatäà gurum

niùsaàçayaà manuñyasya

na punar-janma-sambhavaù

tat tértham-that holy place; sevamänasya-of a servant; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; ca-and; jagatäm- gurum-master of the universes; niùsaàçayam-without doubt; manuñyasya-of a person; na-not; punar-janma-sambhavaù-re-birth.

 

A person who serves both this holy place and Lord Kåñëa, the master of the universes, never takes birth again. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 245

ädi-värähe

tathä kanakhalaà térthaà

guhyaà térthaà paraà mama

snäna-mätreëa taträpi

näka-påñöhe sa modate

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tathä-then; kanakhalam- tértham-Kanakhala-tértha; guhyam-secret; tértham-holy place; param-transcendental; mama-My; snäna-mätreëa'simply by bathing; tatra-there;pi näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky; sah-he; modate-enjoys.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Next is My secret holy place Kanakhala-tértha. A person who once bathes there enjoys in the spiritual sky.

 

Text 246

 

asti kñetraà paraà guhyaà

tindukaà näma nämataù

tasmin snätvä naro devi

mama loke mahéyate

asti-is; kñetram-place; param-great; guhyam-secret; tindukam- näma-named Tinduka-tértha; nämataù-from the name; tasmin-there; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

Next is the secret holy place named Tinduka-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes there become glorified in My abode.

 

Text 247

 

tataù paraà sürya-térthaà

sarva-päpa-pranäçanam

vairocanena balinä

süryas tö ärädhitaù purä

tataù param-next; sürya-tértham-Sürya-tértha; sarva-päpa-pranäçanam-destroying all sins; vairocanena-Virocana's son; balinä-by Bali; süryaù-the sun-god; tu-indeed; ärädhitaù-worshiped; purä-long ago.

 

Next is Surya-tértha, which destroys all sins. Long ago Virocana's son Bali worshiped the son-god there.

 

Text 248

 

ädityo 'hani saìkräntaü grahaëe candra-süryayoù

tasmin snäto naro devi

räjasuya-phalaà labhet

ädityaù-the sun-god; ahani saìkräntau-on Sankranti day; grahaëe-on an eclipse; candra-of the moon; süryayoù-or the sun; tasmin-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; räjasuya-of a rajasuya sacrifice; phalam-result; labhet-attains;

 

O goddess, a person who bathes there on the Äditya-saìkränti day, or on a solar or lunar eclipse, attains the result of performing a Räjasüya-yajïa.

 

Text 249

 

saura-puräëe

tataù paraà vaöa-svämé

térthänäà tértham uttamam

vaöa-svämiöi vikhyäto

yatra devo diväkaraù

saura-puräëe-in the saura Puräëa; tataù param-next; vaöa-svämé-Vatasvami; térthänäm- tértham uttamam'the best of holy places; vaöa-svämiöi-Vatasvami; vikhyätaù-famous; yatra-where; devaù-deity; diväkaraù-the sun-god.

 

In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

Next is Vaöasvämi-tértha, the best of all hoiy places. The deity of the sun-god there is famous as Lord Vaöasvämé.

 

Text 250

 

tat térthaà caiva yo bhaktyä

ravi-väre niñevate

präpnoty arogyam aiçvaryam

ante ca gatim uttamäm

tat-that; tértham-holy place; ca-and; eva-indeed; yaù-who; bhaktyä-with devotion; ravi-väre-on Sunday; niñevate-serves; präpnoti-attains» arogyam-health; aiçvaryam-wealth; ante-at the end; ca-and; gatim-destination; uttamäm-supreme.

 

A person who on Sunday serves this holy place with devotion attains good health, wealth, and, at the end, the supreme destination.

 

Text 251

 

ädi-värähe

yatra dhruvena santaptam

icchayä paramaà tapaù

tatra vai snäna-mätreëa

dhruvaloke mahéyate

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yatra-where; dhruvena-by Dhruva; santaptam-austerities; icchayä-with a desire; paramam-supreme; tapaù-austerity; tatra-there; vai snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; dhruvaloke-on Dhruvaloka; mahéyate-glorified.

 

In the Ädi-väräha Puräëa it is said:

Simply by bathing there (in Dhruva-tértha, where Dhruva Mahäräja earnestly performed servere austerities, a person becomes glorified on Dhruvaloka.

 

Text 252

 

dhruva-térthe tu vasudhe

yaù çräddhaà kurute naraù

pitån santärayate sarvän

pitå-pakñe viçeñataù

dhruva-térthe-at Dhruva-tértha; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; yaù-who; çräddham-sraddha; kurute-does; naraù-a person; pitån-to the pitäs; santärayate-delivers; sarvän-all; pitr„-pakñe-in the pitäs; viçeñataù-specifically.

 

O earth-goddess, a person who performs çräddha at Dhruva-tértha delivers all his ancestors.

 

Text 253

 

saura-puräëe

dhruva-térthaà iti khyätaà

térthaà mukhyaà tataù param

yatra snänavato mokño

dhruva eva na saàçayaù

saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; dhruva-tértham-Dhruva-tértha; iti-thus; khyätam-known; tértham-holy place; mukhyam-best; tataù param-then; yatra-where; snänavataù-from bathing; mokñaù-liberation; dhruva-indeed; eva-indeed; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

Famous Dhruva-tértha is the best of holy places. Simply by bathing there one becomes liberated. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 254

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

gayäyäà piëòa-dänena

yat phalaà hi nåëäà bhavet

tasmä chata-guëaà térthe

piëòa-dänäd dhruvasya ca

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; gayäyäm-at Gayä; piëòa-of piëòa; dänena'by offering; yat-what; phalam-result; hi-indeed; nåëäm-of people; bhavet'may be; tasmä-than that; chata-guëam-a hundred times more; térthe-at the holy place; piëòa-dänäd-than offering of piëòa; dhruvasya-of Dhruva; ca-and.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

The result of offering piëòa at Dhruva-tértha is hundreds of times more than piëòa offered at Gaya.

 

Text 255

 

dhruva-térthe japo homas

tapo dänaà surärcanam

sarva-térthä chata-guëaà

nåëäà tatra phalaà labhet

dhruva-térthe-at Dhruva-tértha; japaù-japa; homaùsacrifice; tapaù-austerity; dänam-charity; sura-of the demigods; arcanam-worship; sarva-térthac-than all holy places; chata-guëam-a hundred times more; nåëäm-of people; tatra-there; phalam-result; labhet-attains;

 

Mantras, agnihotra-yajïas, austerities, charity, and worship of the demigods are hundreds of times more fruitful at Dhruva-tértha than at all other holy places.

 

Text 256

 

ädi-värähe puräëe

dakñiëe dhruva-térthasya

åñi-térthaà prakértitam

tatra snäto naro devi

mama loke mahéyate

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; puräëe-in the Puräëa; dakñiëe-south; dhruva-térthasya-of Dhruva-tértha; åñi-tértham-Rçi-tértha; prakértitam-glorified; tatra-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

South of Dhruva-tértha is famous Rñi-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes there becomes glorified in My abode.

 

Text 257

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

tasmin madhuvane puëyaà

åñi-térthaà hareù priyam

snäna-mätreëa bhü-päla

harau bhaktiù parä bhavet

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tasmin-there; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; puëyam-sacred; åñi-tértham-Rñi-tértha; hareù-to Lord Hari; priyam-dear; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; bhü-päla-O king; harau-for Lord Hari; bhaktiù-devotion; parä-transcendental; bhavet-is.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

In Madhuvana is sacred Rñi-tértha, which is dear to Lord Hari. O king, simply by bathing there one attains transcendental devotional service to Lord Hari.

 

Text 258

 

dakñiëe åñi-térthasya

mokña-térthaà vasundhare

snäna-mätreëa vasudhe

moksaà präpnoti mänavaù

dakñiëe-in the south; åñi-térthasya-of rsi-tértha; mokña-tértham-Moksa-tértha; vasundhare-O earth; snäna-mätreëa'simply by bathing; vasudhe-O earth; moksam-liberation; präpnoti-attains; mänavaù-a person.

 

O earth-goddess, south of Rsi-tértha is Mokña-tértha. O earth-goddess, simply by bathing there a person attains liberation.

 

Text 259

 

ädi-värähe

tatraiva koöi-térthaà tu

devänäm api durlabhamtatra snänena dänena

mama loke mahéyate

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; koöi-tértham-Koti-tértha; tu-indeed; devänäm-for the demigods; api-even; durlabham-difficult to attain; tatra-there; snänena-by âathing; dänena-by giving charity; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

This is Koöi-tértha, which even the demigods cannot attain. Simply by bathing here or giving charity here a person becomes glorified in My abode.

 

Text 260

 

tatraiva bodhi-térthaà hi

pitånäm ati-durlabham

piëòän dattvä tu vasudhe

pitålokaà sa gacchati

tatra-there; eva-indeed; bodhi-tértham-Bodhi-tértha; hi-indeed; pitånäm-for the pitäs; ati-durlabham'very difficult to attain; piëòän-piëòa; dattvä-offering; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; pitålokam-to Pitrloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

This is Bodhi-tértha, which even the pitäs cannot attain. O earth-goddess, simply by offering piëòa here a person goes to Pitåloka.

 

Text 261

 

dvädaçaitäni térthäni

devänäà durlabhäni ca

teñäà smaraëa-mätreëa

sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

dvädaça-12; etäni-these; térthäni-holy places; devänäm-for the demigods; durlabhäni-difficult to attain; ca-and; teñäm-of them;û smaraëa-mätreëa-simply by remembering; sarva-päpaiù-from all sins; pramucyate-becomes free.

 

Even the demigods cannot attain these twelve holy places. Simply by remembering these holy places one becomes free from all sins.

 

Text 262

uttare tö asi-kuëòasya

térthaà tu nara-saàjïakam

nara-térthät paraà térthaà

na bhütaà na bhaviñyati

uttare-in the north; tu-certainly; asi-kuëòasya-of Asi-kuëòa; tértham-holy place; tu-indeed; nara-saàjïakam-named Nara-tértha; nara-térthät'Nara-tértha; param-after; tértham-holy place; na-not; bhütam-was; na-not; bhaviñyati-will be.

 

North of Asi-kuëòa is Nara-tértha. No holy place is, or ever will be, better than Nara-tértha.

 

Text 263

 

tataù samyamanaà näma

térthaà trailokya-viçrutam

tatra snäto naro devi

mama lokaà sa gacchati

tataù-next; samyamanam- näma tértham-named Samyamana-tértha; trailokya-viçrutam-famous in the three worlds; tatra-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; lokam-planet; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

Next is Samyamana-tértha, which is famous in the three worlds. O goddess, a person who bathes there goes to My abode.

 

Text 264

 

dhärä-patanake snätvä

näka-påñöhe sa modate

athätra muïcate präëän

mama lokaà sa gacchati

dhärä-patanake-at Dharapatanaka-tértha; snätvä-having bathed; näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky; sah-he; modate-enjoys; atha-then; atra-here; muïcate'giving up; präëän-life; mama-My; lokam-planet; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

A person who bathes at Dhäräpatanaka-tértha enjoys in the spiritual sky. A person who dies here goes to My abode.

 

Text 265

 

ataù paraà näga-térthaà

térthänäm uttamottamam

yatra snätvä divaà yänti

ye måtäs te 'punar-bhavaù

ataù param-next; näga-tértham-Näga-tértha; térthänäm uttama-uttamam-the very best of holy places; yatra-where; snätvä-having bathed; divam-the spiritual world; yänti-attain; ye-who; måtäù te-they; apunar-bhavaù-no birth again.

 

Next is Näga-tértha, the best of holy places. They who bathe there go to the spiritual world. When they die they do not return to the world of birth and death.

 

Text 266

 

ghaëöäbharaëakaà térthaà

sarva-päpa-pramocanam

yatra snäto naro devi

süryaloke mahéyate

ghaëöäbharaëakam- tértham-Ghantabhara-tértha; sarva-päpa-pramocanam-freeing from all sins; yatra-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; süryaloke-on Süryaloka; mahéyate-glorified.

 

Next is Ghaëöäbharaëa-tértha, which removes all sins. O goddess, a person who bathes there becomes glorified on the sun-planet.

 

Text 267

 

térthänäm uttamaà térthaà

brahmaloketi viçrutam

tatra snätvä ca pétvä ca

samyato niyatäçanaù

brahmaëä samanujïäto

viñëulokaà sa gacchati

térthänäm uttamam- tértham-the ultimate holy place; brahmaloka-Brahmaloka; iti-thus; viçrutam-famous; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; pétvä-having drunk; ca-and; samyataù-controlling the senses; niyatäçanaù-fasting; brahmaëä-by Brahmä; samanujïätaù-blessed; viñëulokam-to Viñëuloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

Next is Brahmaloka-tértha, the best of holy places. A person who bathes there, drinks its water, fasts, and controls his senses, attains Lord Brahmä's blessings and goes to Viñëuloka.

 

Text 268

 

soma-térthe tu vasudhe

pavitre yamunämbhasétatrabhiñekaà kurvéta

sva-sva-karma-pratiñöhitaù

modate somaloke tu

sa eva nätra saàçayaù

soma-térthe-at Soma-tértha; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; pavitre-pure; yamunä-ambhasi-in the Yamuna' water; tatra-there; abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; sva-sva-karma-pratiñöhitaù-properly performing prescribed duties; modate-enjoys; somaloke-on Somaloka; tu-indeed; sah-this; eva-indeed; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

O earth-goddess, a person who properly performs his prescribed duties and bathes in the waters of the Yamunä at Soma-tértha, enjoys in the moon-planet. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 269

 

sarasvatyäç ca patanaà

sarva-päpa-haraà çubham

tatra snätvä naro devi

avarëo 'pi yatir bhavet

sarasvatyäs" ca patanam-Sarasvatipatana-tértha; sarva-päpa-haram-removing all sins; çubham-sacred; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; avarëaù-a person of the lowest class; api-even; yatir-a sannyasi; bhavet-becomes.

 

Next is sacred Sarasvatépatana-tértha, which removes all sins. O goddess, if a man of even the lowest class bathes there, he becomes a sannyäsé.

 

Text 270

 

cakratérthaà tu vikhyätaà

mäthure mama maëòale

yas tatra kurute snänaà

tri-rätropoñito naraù

snäna-mätreëa manujo

mucyate brahma-hatyayä

cakratértham-Cakratértha; tu-indeed; vikhyätam-famous; mäthure-in Mathurä; mama-My; maëòale-circle; yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; tri-rätra-for three nights; upoñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; manujaù-a person; mucyate-free; brahma-hatyayä-from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

 

Cakra-tértha is famous in My circle of Mathurä. A person who, fasting there for three nights, bathes there, simply by that bath becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

 

Text 271

 

daçäçvamedham åñibhiù

püjitaà sarvadä purä

tatra ye snänti niyatäs

teñäà svargo na durlabhaù

daçäçvamedham-Dasasvamedha; åñibhiù-by the sages; püjitam-worshiped; sarvadä-always; purä-formerly; tatra-there; ye-who; snänti-bathe; niyatäùcontrolling the senses; teñäm-of them; svargaù-Svargaloka; na-not; durlabhaù-difficult to attain.

 

Daçäçvamedha-tértha is always worshiped by the great sages. For self-controlled persons who bathe there Svargaloka is not difficult to attain.

 

Text 272

 

térthaà tu vighnaräjasya

puëyaà päpa-haraà çubham

tatra snätaà ca manujaà

vighna-räjo na péòayet

tértham-tértha; tu-indeed; vighnaräjasya-of Vighnaraja; puëyam-sacred; päpa-haram-removing sin; çubham-auspicious; tatra-there; snätam- ca-and; manujam-a person; vighna-räjaù-Vighnaräja; na-not; péòayet-troubles.

 

Sacred and auspicious Vighnaräja-tértha removes sins. Vighnaräja will not trouble a person who has bathed there.

 

Text 273

 

tataç ca koti-térthaà tu

pavitraà paramaà çubham

tatraiva snäna-mätreëa

koöi-godänajaà phalam

tataù-next; ca-and; koti-tértham-Koti-tértha; tu-indeed; pavitram-pure; paramam-sacred; çubham-auspicious; tatra-there; eva-indeed; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; koöi-millions; godänajam-of giving cows; phalam-result.

 

Next is sacred and auspicious Koöi-tértha. By bathing there one attains the result of offering millions of cows in charity.

 

Text 274

mathurä-khaëòa-mate tu viçrantià vina caturviàçatitvam. tathä hi

mathurä-khaëòa-mate-the opion of Mathura'-khaëòa; tu-indeed; viçrantim-Viçränti-tértha; vina-except; caturviàçatitvam-24; tathä hi-furthermore.

 

Without considering Viçranti-tértha, 24 holy places are described in the Mathura-khaëòa in the following words.

 

Text 275

 

catur-viàçati-térthäni

tat-térthäd dakñiëottare

daçäçvamedha-paryantaà

mokñäntaà ca yudhiñöhira

catur-viàçati-24; térthäni-holy places; tat-térthäd-of that holy place; dakñiëa-south; uttare-and north; daçäçvamedha-Dasasvamedha; paryantam-until; mokña-Mokña-tértha; antam-at the end;û ca-and; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira.

 

O Yudhiñöhira, beginning with Daçäçvamedha-tértha, and culminating in Mokña-tértha, there are 24 holy places north and south of that holy place.

 

Text 276

 

athätratya-parama-prasiddha-térthanaà mähätmyam. atra gokarëasya yathä saura-puräëe

tato gokarëa-térthäkhyaà

térthaà tri-bhuvana-çrutam

vidyate viçvanäthasya

viñëor atyanta-vallabham

atha-then; ätratya-there; parama-prasiddha-térthanam-of very famous holy places; mähätmyam-glorification; atra-here; gokarëasya-of Gokarëa; yathä-as; saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; gokarëa-térthäkhyam- tértham-Gokarëa-tértha; tri-bhuvana-çrutam-famous in the three worlds; vidyate-is; viçvanäthasya-the master of the universes; viñëor'of Lord Viñëu; atyanta-very; vallabham-dear.

 

Glorification of of the Famous Holy Places There

Glorification of Gokarëa-tértha

In the Saura Puräëa iti is said:

Next is the holy place named Gokarëa-tértha, which is famous in the three worlds and very dear to Lord Viñëu, the master of the universes.

 

Text 277

 

kåñëa-gaìgäyäù. ädi-värähe

païca-térthabhiñekä ca

yat phalaà labhate naraù

kåñëa-gaìgä daça-guëaà

diçate tu dine dine

kåñëa-gaìgäyäù-of the Kåñëa-gaìgä; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; païca-five; tértha-holy places; abhiñekä-because of bathing; ca-and; yat-what; phalam-result; labhate-obtains; naraù kåñëa-gaìgä-Kåñëa-gaìgä; daça-guëam-ten times more; diçate-shows; tu-indeed; dine dine-every day.

 

Glorification of Kåñëa-gaìgä

The pious result a person attains by bathing at five holy places is attained, multiplied by ten, every day at Kåñëa-gaìgä.

 

Text 278

 

vaikuëöha-térthasya

vaikuëöha-térthe yaù snäti

mucyate sarva-pätakaiù

sarva-päpa-vinirmukto

brahmalokaà sa gacchati

vaikuëöha-térthasya-of Vaikuëöha-tértha; vaikuëöha-térthe-at Vaikuëöha-tértha; yaù-one who; snäti-bathes; mucyate-is freed; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-freed from all sins; brahmalokam-to Brahmaloka; saù-he; gacchati-goes.

 

Glorification of Vaikuëöha-tértha

A person who bathes at Vaikuëöha-tértha becomes free from all sins. Free from all sins, he goes to the spiritual world.

 

Text 279-280

 

asi-kuëòasya

ekä varäha-saàjïä ca

tathä näräyaëé parä

vämanä ca tåtéyä vai

caturthé laìgalé çubhä

etäç catasro yaù paçyet

snätvä kuëòe 'si-saàjïake

catuù-sägara-paryantä

kräntä tena dharä dhruvam

térthänäà mathuränäà ca

sarveñäà phalam açnute

asi-kuëòasya-of Asi-kuëòa; ekä-one; varäha-saàjïä-named Varäha; ca-and; tathä-then; näräyaëé-Näräyaëa; parä-great; vämanä-Vämana; ca-and; tåtéyä-third; vai-indeed; caturthé-fourth; laìgalé-Balaräma; çubhäh-auspicious; etäù-these; catasraù-four; yaù-who; paçyet-may see; snätvä-having bathed; kuëòe asi-saàjïake-in Asi-kuëòa; catuù-sägara-paryantä kräntä-up to the four oceans; tena-by him; dharä-the earth; dhruvam-indeed; térthänäm-of holy places; mathuränäm-of Mathurä; ca-and; sarveñäm-of all; phalam-the result; açnute-enjoys.

 

Glorification of of Asi-kuëòa

First is Varäha. Then is Näräyaëa. Third is Vämana. Fourth is Balaräma. A person who sees these four Deities and bathes in Asi-kuëòa attains the result of visiting all holy places in Mathura' and all other holy places within the boundaries of the world's four seas.

 

Text 281

 

atha kälindé-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe

gaìgä çata-guëä proktä

mäthure mama maëòale

yamunä viçrutä devi

nätra käryä vicaraëä

atha-now; kälindé-of the Yamunä; mähätmyam-glorification;. ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; gaìgä-the Ganges; çata-guëä-a hundred times more; proktä-said; mäthure-in Mathurä; mama-My; maëòale-circle; yamunä-Yamunä; viçrutä-famous; devi-O goddess; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicaraëä-doubt.

 

Glorification of the Yamunä

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O goddess, the Yamunä in My circle of Mathura' is a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 282

tatra térthäni guhyäni

bhaviñyanti mamänaghe

yeñu snäto naro devi

mama loke mahéyate

tatra-there; térthäni-holy places; guhyäni-secret; bhaviñyanti-will be; mama-My; anaghe-O sinless one; yeñu-in which; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

O sinless one, in the Yamunä will be many secret places sacred to Me. O goddess, a person who bathes in them is glorified in My abode.

 

Text 283

 

yamunä-salile snätaù

çucir bhütvä jitendriyaù

samäbhyarcyäcyutaà samyäk

präpnoti paramäà gatim

yamunä-salile-in the Ymaunä's waters; snätaù-bathed; çucir-pure; bhütvä-becoming; jita-conquered; indriyaù-senses; samäbhyarcya-having worshiped; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; samyäk-completely; präpnoti-attains; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.

 

A person who bathes in the Yamunä's waters becomes pure and sense-controlled. He worships Lord Acyuta and attains the supreme destination.

 

Text 284

 

värähe

nadé tatra varärohe

çubha puëyojjvalodakä

vivasvataù sutä puëyä

yamunä vai bhaviñyati

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; nadé-river; tatra-there; varärohe-O beautiful one; çubha-auspicious; puëya-pure; ujjvala-splendid; udakä-waters; vivasvataù-of the sun-god; sutä-the daughter; puëyä-saintly; yamunä-Yamunä; vai-indeed; bhaviñyati-will be.

 

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

O beautiful girl, in this place will be the Yamunä, the auspicious, pure, and splendid river that is the saintly daughter of the sun-god.

Text 285

 

sä prayäge tu suçroni

brahma-kñetre mahä-yaçaù

sameñyati na sandeho

gaìgäyäs tad anantaram

sä-she; prayäge-at Prayäga; tu-indeed; suçroni-O beautiful girl; brahma-kñetre-in Brahma-kñetra; mahä-great; yaçaù-fame; sameñyati-will meet; na-not; sandehaù-doubt; gaìgäyaù-the Ganges; tad anantaram-after.

 

O beautiful girl, this glorious river will meet the Ganges at Prayäga in Brahma-kñetra. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 286

 

mätsye yudhiñöhira-närada-samväde

tatra snätvä ca pétvä ca

yamunäyäà yudhiñöhira

kértanäl labhate puëyaà

dåñövä bhadräëi paçyati

mätsye-in the Matsya Puräëa; yudhiñöhira-närada-samväde-in the conversation of Närada and Yudhiñöhira; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; pétvä-having drunk; ca-and; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira; kértanäl-from the glorification; labhate-attains; puëyam-piety; dåñövä-having seen; bhadräëi-auspiciousness; paçyati-sees.

 

In the Matsya Puräëa, in the conversation of Yudhiñöhira and Närada, it is said:

O Yudhiñöhira, a person who bathes in the Yamunä, glorifies it, and drinks its waters, attains piety. He sees auspiciousness.

 

Text 287

 

avagähya ca pétvä ca

punäty asaptamaà kulam

präëäàs tyajati yas tatra

sa yäti paramäà gatim

avagähya-plunging; ca-and; pétvä-drinking; ca-and; punäti-purifies; ä-saptamam-up to seven; kulam-family; präëän-life breathl; tyajati-abandond» yaù-one who; tatra-there; sah-he; yäti-goes; paramäm- gatim-to the supreme destination.

A person who enters the Yamunä and drinks its waters purifies seven generations of ancestors. A person who dies in the Yamunä goes to the supreme destination.

 

Text 288

 

viñëu-dharmottare

yatra kvacana kälindyäà

kåtvä çräddhaà narädhipa

akñayaà phalam äpnoti

näka-påñöhe sa modate

viñëu-dharma-uttare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; yatra-where; kvacana-somewhere; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; kåtvä-having done; çräddham-sraddha; narädhipa-O king; akñayam-eternal; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky; sah-he; modate-enjoys.

 

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

O king, a person who offers çräddha by the Yamunä attains an eternal result. He enjoys in the spiritual sky.

 

Text 289

 

padma-puräëe pätäla-khaëòe

raso yaù paramädhäraù

sac-cid-änanda-lakñaëaù

brahmety-upaniñad-gétaù

sa eva yamunä svayam

pävanäyäsya jagataù

sarid bhütvä sasära ha

padma-puräëe pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; rasaù-nectar; yaù-which; paramädhäraù-supreme river; sac-eternal; cid-spiritual;änanda-blissful; lakñaëaù-characteristics; brahma-Brahman; iti-thus; upaniñad-in the Upaniñads; gétaù-called; sa-that; eva-indeed; yamunä-Yamunä; svayam-personally; pävanäya-to purify; asya-of this; jagataù-universe; sarid-a river; bhütvä-having become;û sasära ha-flowed.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

The flood of eternal, blissful spiritual nectar, which is called Brahman in the Upaniñads, is the Yamunä, which has become a flowing river to purify the worlds.

Text 290

 

tathä

pätaké pätakän muktaù

puëyäòhyaù syäd apätaké

phaläbhisandhi-rahitaù

kälindyäm eva mucyate

tathä-then; pätaké-sinful; pätakät-fropm sin; muktaù-free; puëyäòhyaù-pious; syäd-becomes; apätaké'sinless; phala-abhisandhi-rahitaù-free from sinful reaction; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; eva-indeed; mucyate-is liberated.

 

By the Yamunä's touch a sinful person becomes free from sin, pious and saintly. Free from past sinful reactions, he becomes liberated.

 

Text 291

 

snänädi-karma kälindyäà

yena kenäpi yat kåtam

yathävad ayathävad vä

tat sädhu phalavad bhavet

snäna-bathing; ädi-beginning with; karma-action; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; yena kenäpi-by someone; yat-which; kåtam-done; yathävad-properly; ayathävad-improperly; vä-or; tat-that; sädhu-sacred; phalavad-result; bhavet-is.

 

Whether one bathes or worships the Yamunä properly or improperly he will attain the sacred result.

Text 292

 

viçeña eva kälindyäà

måte yati hareù padam

mathurä-saìgatayaà tu

harir eva bhaven naraù

viçeñah-specifically; eva-indeed; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; måte-dead; yati-attains; hareù-of Lord Hari; padam-the feet; mathurä-saìgatayam-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; harir-Lord Hari; eva-indeed; bhavet-becomes; naraù-person.

 

A person who dies in the Yamunä goes to the abode of Lord Hari. A person who dies in the Yamunä as it flows through Mathura' attains a spiritual form like that of Lord Hari.

 

Text 293

tatraiva hara-gauri-samväde

brahma-jïänena mucyante

käçyäà ca maraëe naraù

athavä snäna-mätreëa

kåñëäyäà kåñëa-sannidhau

tatra-there; eva-indeed; hara-gauri-samväde-in the conversation of Çiva and Gauré; brahma-jïänena-with spiritual knowledge; mucyante-are free; käçyäm-in Väräëasé; ca-and; maraëe-in death; naraù-a person; athavä-or; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; kåñëäyäm-in the Yamunä; kåñëa-sannidhau-near Kåñëa.

 

In the same scripture, in the conversation between Çiva and Gauré, it is said:

By attaining spiritual knowledge, they who die at Väräëasé become liberated. On the other hand, simply by bathing in the Yamunä, the devotees attain the association of Lord Kåñëa.

 

Text 294

 

yamunä-jala-kallole

kréòate devaké-sutaù

tatra snätvä mahä-devi

sarva-tértha-phalaà labhet

yamunä-jala-kallole-in the Yamunä's waves;; kréòate'plays; devaké-sutaù-Devaké's son; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; mahä-devi-O goddess; sarva-tértha-of all holy places; phalam-result; labhet-attains.

 

Devaké's son plays in the Yamunä's waves. O great goddess, a person who bathes there attains the result of visiting all holy places.

 

Text 295

 

aho abhägyaà lokasya

na pétaà yamunä-jalam

go-gopa-gopikä-saìge

yatra kréòati kaàsa-hä

ahaù-Oh; abhägyam-misofrtune; lokasya-of the people; na-not; pétam-drunk; yamunä-jalam-Yamuna' water; gaù-cows; gopa-gopas; gopikä-gopés; saìge-in company; yatra-where; kréòati-plays; kaàsa-hä-Kåñëa.

 

Oh the misfortune of they who have not drunk the Yamunä's waters, where the killer of Kaàsa plays with the cows, gopas, and gopés!

 

Text 296

 

tatraiva nirväëa-khaëòe

cid-änandamayé säkñäd

yamunä yama-bhéti-nut

tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvana-khaëòa; cid-änandamayé-full of spiritual bliss; säkñäd-directly; yamunä-Yamunä; yama-of Yama;; bhéti-the fear; nut-removing.

 

In the Nirväëa-khaëòa it is said:

The spiritual, blisssful Yamunä removes the fear of Yamaräja.

 

Text 297

 

käla-viçeñe tatra snänädi-phalam. ädi-värähe

jyaiñöhasya çukla-dvädaçyäà

samabhyarcya janärdanam

dhanyo 'sau piëòa-nirväpaà

yamunäyäà kariñyati

käla-time; viçeñe-specific; tatra-there; snäna-bathing; ädi-beginning with; phalam-result; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-dvädaçyäm-in the çukla-dvädaçé; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; janärdanam-Janärdana; dhanyaù-fortunate; .asau-he; piëòa-nirväpam-offering piëòa; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; kariñyati-will do.

 

The Result of Bathing and Other Devotional Activities Performed There at Certain Specifé Times

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

A person who during the çukla-ekädaçé of the month of Jyaiñöha (May-June, worships Lord Janärdana by the Yamunä's shore, becomes fortunate and attains the result of offering piëòa.

Text 298-299

 

çri-viñëu puräëe

yamunä-salile snätaù

puruño muni-sattamäjyaiñöha-müle 'male pakñe

dvädaçyäm upaväsa-kåt

samabhyarcyäcyutaà samyäg

yamunäyäà samähitaù

açvamedhasya yajïasya

präpnoty adhikajaà phalam

çri-viñëu puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; yamunä-salile-in the Yamunä's water;; snätaù-bathed; puruñaù-a person; muni-sattama-O great sage; jyaiñöha-müle-in the star Mula in month of Jyaistha; amale pakñe dvädaçyäm'in the çukla-dvädaçé; upaväsa-kåt-fasting; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; samyäk-completely; yamunäyäm- samähitaù-in the Yamunä; açvamedhasya yajïasya-of an asvamedha sacrifice; präpnoti-attains» adhikajam-greater; phalam-result.

 

In the Çré Viñëu Puräëa it is said:

O great sage, a person who, fasting, bathes in the Yamunä's waters during the Müla'-nakñatra in the çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Jyaiñöha, and then with a peaceful heart worships Lord Acyuta on the Yamunä's shore, attains a result greater than the result of an açvamedha-yajïa.

 

Text 300-301

 

tatraiva pitåëäà väkyam

kaçcid asmat-kule jätaù

kälindé-saliläplutaù

arcayiñyati govindaà

mathuräyäm upoñitaù

jyaiñöha-müle 'male pakñe

yenaiva vayam apy uta

paräm åddhim aväpa syämas

täritäù sva-kulodbhavaiù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; pitåëäm-of pitäs; väkyam-statement; kaçcid-someone; asmat-kule-in our family; jätaù-born; kälindé-of the Yamunä; salila-in the water; äplutaù-bathed; arcayiñyati-will worship; govindam-Lord Govinda; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä» upoñitaù-fasting; jyaiñöha-müle-in the month of Jyaistha during the star Mula; amale pakñe-in the bright half; yena-by whom; eva-indeed; vayam-we; api-also; uta-indeed; paräm-supreme; åddhim-opulence; aväpa-attained; syämaùare täritäù-delivered; sva-kulodbhavaiù-with our relatives.

 

In the same scripture, the Pitäs say:

Someone in our family will fast, bathe in the Yamunä's waters, and worship Lord Govinda in Mathura' during the Mülä-nakñatra in the bright half of the month of Jyaiñöha. Becasue of his deed we were delivered and we attained sublime opulence.

 

Text 302

 

jyaiñöhasya çukla-dvädaçyäà

samabhyarcya janärdanam

dhanyo 'sau piëòa-nirväpaà

yamunäyäà kariñyati

jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-dvädaçyäm-in the çukla-dvädaçé; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; janärdanam-Lord Janärdana; dhanyaù-fortunate; asau-he; piëòa-nirväpam-offering piëòa; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; kariñyati-will do.

 

A person who during the çukla-dvädaçé in the month of Jyaiñöha worships Lord Janärdana by the Yamunä's shore is fortunate. He will attain the result of offering piëòa.

Text 303

 

brahma-vaivarte

jyaiñöhämüläsite pakñe

samabhyarcya janärdanaà

dhanyänäà kulajaù piëòän

yamunäyäà pradäsyati

brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; jyaiñöhä-mülä-site pakñe-in the Mula-naksatra in the bright half of the month of Jyaistha; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; janärdanam-Lord Janärdana; dhanyänäm-fortunate; kulajaù-descendent; piëòän-piëòa; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; pradäsyati-will give.

 

In the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa it is said:

A person who during Mülä-nakñatra in the bright fortnight of the month of Jyaiñöha worships Lord Janärdana by the Yamunä's shore, attains the same result a person born in a noble family attains when offering piëòa.

 

Text 304-305

 

båhan-näradéye

jyaiñöhe mäsi paurëamäsyäà

mülarkñe präyato naraù

snätvä ca yamunäyäà vai

mathuräyäm upoñitaù

abhyarcya vidhinä viñëuà

yat phalaà labhate dvijaù

tat pravaksyämi vaù samyäk

çåëudhvaà gadato mama

båhan-näradéye-in the Brhan Narada Puräëa; jyaiñöhe mäsi-in the month of Jyaistha; paurëamäsyäm-in the full moon; mülarkñe-in the Mula-naksatra; präyataù-mostly; naraù-a person; snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; vai-indeed; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; upoñitaù-fasting; abhyarcya-worshiping; vidhinä-according to the rules; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; yat-what; phalam-result; labhate-attains; dvijaù-a brähmaëa; tat-that; pravaksyämi-I will say; vaù-to you; samyäk-completely; çåëudhvam-please listen; gadataù-speaking; mama-My.

 

In the Båhan-Närada Puräëa it is said:

Listen, O brähmaëas, and I will tell you the result a person attains when, during the Müla'-nakñatra in the full moon of the month of Jyaiñöha, he fasts in Mathurä, bathes in the Yamunä, and then worships Lord Viñëu.

 

Text 306

 

janmäyutärjitaiù päpair

muktaù koöi-kulänvitaù

brahmaëaù padam äsädya

tatraiva parimucyate

janma-births; äyuta-billions; arjitaiù päpair-from the sins; muktaù-free; koöi-kula-anvitaù-with millions of relatives; brahmaëaù-of Brahmä; padam-the abode; äsädya-attaining; tatra-there; eva-indeed; parimucyate-is liberated.

 

He becomes free from the sins of billions of births. With millions of his family he goes to Brahma's abode and then he becomes liberated.

 

Text 307 and 308

 

padma-puräëe

saìkräntau ravi-väre ca

saptamyäà vaidhåtau tathä

vyatipäte ca hastarkñe

tväñöre pauïce punar-vasau

ekadäçyäà caturdaçyäm

añöamyäà ca vidhukñaye

paurëamäsyäà ca pürvoktaà

phalaà çata-guëaà bhavet

padma-puräëe-in the Padma Puräëa; saìkräntau-in Sankranti; ravi-väre-on Sunday; ca-and; saptamyäm-on saptami; vaidhåtau-during Vaidhrti; tathä-then; vyatipäte-on Vyatipata; ca-and; hastarkñe-during Hasta-naksatra; tväñöre-Tvastra; pauïce'panca; punarvasau-Punarvasu; ekadäçyäm-ekädaçé; caturdaçyäm-caturdasi; añöamyäm-astami; ca-and; vidhukñaye-the new moon; paurëamäsyäm-the full moon; ca-and; pürva-previously; uktam-said; phalam-result; çata-guëam-increased a hundred times; bhavet-will be.

 

In the Padma Puräëa it is said:

On Saìkränti, Sunday, Saptamé, Vaidhåti, Vyatipäta, Hastä-nakñatra, Tväñöra, Pauïca, Punarvasu, Ekädaçé, Caturdaçé, Añöamé, the new moon, and the full moon, the previously described results are multiplied hundreds of times.

 

Text 309

 

tad eva koöi-guëitaà

grahaëe candra-süryayoù

dvädaçyäm arcayed viñëum

ekadaçyäm upoñya yaù

kälindyäà tasya sulabhaà

tad viñëoù paramaà padam

tad-that; eva-indeed; koöi-guëitam-multiplied by millions of times; grahaëe candra-süryayoù-in an eclipse of the sun or the moon; dvädaçyäm-on a dvädaçé; arcayed-may worship; viñëum-Viñëu; ekadaçyäm-on ekädaçé; upoñya-fasting; yaù-who; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; tasya-of him; sulabham-easy to attain; tad-that; viñëoù-of Viñëu; paramam-supreme; padam-abode.

 

During a solar or lunar eclipse the results are multiplied by millions of times. A person who by the shore of the Yamuna' worships Lord Viñëu on Dvädaçé or fasts on Ekädaçé, easily attains Lord Viñëu's transcendental abode.

 

Text 310

 

atha mathurä-brähmaëa-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe

anåco mäthuro yaç ca

catur-vedas tathä paraù

catur-vedaà parityajya

mäthuraà bhojayed dvijam

atha-now; mathurä-brähmaëa-mähätmyam-glorification of the brähmaëas in Mathurä; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anrcaù-not learned in the Vedé mantras; mäthuraù-from Mathurä; yaù-who; ca-and; catur-vedaù-learned in the four Vedas; tathä-so; paraù-greater; catur-vedam-the four Vedas; parityajya-abandoning; mäthuram-from Mathurä; bhojayed-should feed; dvijam-the brähmaëa.

 

Glorification of Mathurä's Brähmaëas

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

There are two brähmaëas. One lives in Mathura' and is not learned in the Vedas. The other does not live in Mathurä, although he knows the four Vedas very well. One should ignore the brähmaëa learned in the four Vedas and should feed the brähmaëa who lives in Mathurä.

 

Text 311

 

kåñi-balo duräcäro

dharma-märga-paräì-mukhaù

édåço 'pi püjanéyo

mäthuro mama rüpa-dhåk

kåñi-balaù-a farmer; duräcäraù-a ruffian; dharma-märga-parän--mukhaù-one averse to the path of religion; édåçaù-like this; api-even; püjanéyaù-should be worshiped; mäthuraù-from Mathurä; mama-My; rüpa-dhåk-own form.

 

Whether a farmer, a ruffian, or a sinner who turns his face from the path of religion, any resident of Mathura' should be worshiped. He is representation of My own form.

 

Text 312

 

mäthuränäà ca yad rüpaà

tad rüpaà me vasundare

ekasmin bhojite vipre

koöir bhavati bhojitäù

mäthuränäm-of the people of Mathurä; ca-and; yad rüpam-what form; tad rüpam-that form; me-of Me; vasundare'O earth; ekasmin-in one place; bhojite-fed; vipre-a brähmaëa; koöir-millions; bhavati'is; bhojitäù-fed.

 

O earth-goddess, the brähmaëas of Mathura' are My own form. When one of them is fed it is like feeding millions of other brähmaëas.

Text 313

 

mäthurä mama püjyä hi

mäthurä mama vallabhäù

mäthure parituñöe vai

tuñöo 'haà nätra saàçayaù

mäthurä-from Mathurä; mama-My; püjyä-to be worshiped; hi-indeed; mäthurä-the people of Mathurä; mama-My; vallabhäù-dear; mäthure-in Mathurä; parituñöe-pleased; vai-indeed; tuñöaù-pleased; aham-I; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

Mathurä's brähmaëas are worshiped by Me. Mathurä's brähmaëas are dear to Me. When Mathurä's brähmaëas are pleased, I am pleased. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 314

 

bhavanti puëya-térthäni

puëyäny ayatanäni ca

maìgaläni ca sarväni

yatra tiñöhanti mäthuräù

bhavanti-are; puëya-térthäni-holy places; puëyäny ayatanäni-holy temples; ca-and; maìgaläni-auspicious; ca-and; sarväni-all; yatra-where; tiñöhanti-stand; mäthuräù-people of Mathurä.

 

All holy places, all holy temples, and all auspiciousnesses stay where Mathurä-brähmaëas reside.

 

Text 315

 

atha mathurä-väsi-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe

ye vasanti mahä-bhäge

mathuräà itare janäù

te 'pi yänti paräà siddhià

mat-prasädän na saàçayaù

atha-now; mathurä-väsi-mähätmyam-glorification of the residents of Mathurä; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; ye-who; vasanti'reside; mahä-bhäge-O fortunate one; mathuräm-Mathura' itare janäù-other people; te-they; api yänti-attain; paräm-supreme; siddhim-perfection; mat-prasädät-from My mercy; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

Glorification of the Residents of Mathurä

In the Ädi-väräha Puräëa it is said:

O fortunate one, they who reside in Mathura', but are not brähmaëas, by My mercy attain the supreme perfection. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 316

 

yas tatra nivased devi

samyato hi jitendriyaù

tri-kälam api bhuïjäno

väyu-bhakña-samo hi saù

yaù-who; tatra-there; nivased-resides; devi-O goddess; samyataù-controlled; hi-indeed; jita-indriyaù-conquered the senses; tri-kälam'three times; api-also; bhuïjänaù-eating; väyu-bhakña-samaù-equal to someone who eats the wind; hi-indeed; saù-he.

 

O goddess, a person who lives there (in Mathurä), although he be a prisoner of his senses, is like one who has conquered them, and although he eats three times a day, is like an sceté that only eats the wind.

 

Text 317

 

mathuräyäà mahä-puryäà

ye vasanty açcui-vratäù

balibhikña-pradätäro

deväs te nara-vigrahäù

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; mahä-puryäm-the great city; ye-who; vasanti-reside; açcui-to uncelan deeds; vratäù-vowed; balibhikña-pradätäraù-granting benedictions; deväù-demigods; te-they; nara-vigrahäù-in the forms of men.

 

They who, although avowed to unclean works, live in the great city of Mathurä, are demigods that grant benedictions, although they bear human forms.

 

Text 318

 

mathurä-väsino lokäù

sarve te mukti-bhäjanäù

api kéöäù pataìgo vä

tiryag-yoni-gato 'pi vä

mathurä-väsino lokäù-residents of Mathurä; sarve-all; te-they; mukti-bhäjanäù-liberated; api'even; kéöäù-worms and insects; pataìgaù-moths and birds; vä tiryag-yoni-gataù-beasts; api-even; vä-or.

 

They who live in Mathurä, even the worms, insects, moths, birds, and beasts, are all liberated.

Text 319

 

tiñöhed yuga-sahasraà tu

padänaikena yaù pumän

tasyädhikaà bhavet puëyaà

mathuräyäà niväsinaù

tiñöhed-may stay; yuga-sahasram-for na thousand yugas; tu-indeed; pada-anaikena-standing on one foot; yaù-who; pumän-a person; tasya-of him; adhikam-greater; bhavet-is; puëyam-piety; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; niväsinaù-residents.

 

By living in Mathura' one attains more piety than by performing the harsh austerity of standing on one foot for a thousand yugas.

 

Text 320

 

para-dara-ratä ye ca

ye narä ajitendriyäù

mathurä-väsinaù sarve

te devä nara-vigrahäù

para-dara-ratä-adulterers; ye-who; ca-and; ye-who; naräh-people; ajitendriyäù-uncontrolled senses» mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; sarve-all; te-they; deväh-demigods; nara-vigrahäù'in huamn form.

 

They who live in Mathura' and are adulterers, or are defeated by their senses, are all demigods in human form.

 

Text 321

 

siddhä bhüta-gaëäù sarve

ye ca deva-gaëä bhuvi

mathurä-väsino lokäàs

te paçyanti catur-bhujän

siddhäh-Siddhas; bhüta-gaëäù-Bhutas; sarve-all; ye-who; ca-and; deva-gaëäh-devas; bhuvi-on the earth; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; lokäàùpeople; te-they; paçyanti'see; catur-bhujän-with four arms.

 

All Siddhas, Bhütas, and Devas who come to earth see the people of Mathura' as four-armed residents of Vaikuëöha.

 

Text 322

 

mathuräyäà ye vasanti

viñëu-rüpä hi te khalüajïänäs tän na paçyanti

paçyanti jïäna-cakñuñaù

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ye-who; vasanti-reside; viñëu-rüpäh-forms of Viñëu; hi-indeed; te-they; khalu-indeed; ajïänäù-unknowing; tan-them; na-not; paçyanti-see; paçyanti-see; jïäna-of knowledge; cakñuñaù-with eyes.

 

They who live in Mathura' have forms like Lord Viñëu's form. The ignorant cannot see it, but they who have eyes of knowledge see it.

 

Text 323

 

mathuräyäà pure yas tu

präsädaà pura-väsinäm

kärayitvä tu manujo

jäyate sa catur-bhujaù

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; pure-in the city; yaù-who; tu-indeed; präsädam-a palace; pura-väsinäm-of the people of the city; kärayitvä-creating; tu-indeed; manujaù-a person; jäyate-is born; sah-he; catur-bhujaù-with four arms.

 

A person who builds a palace for the residents of Mathura' becomes in his next birth a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.

 

Text 324

 

skände

mathurä-väsino lokän

manasäpi dviñanti ye

na jätu bhavitä teñäà

viraho nirayaiù saha

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; lokän-worlds; manasä-with the heart; api-even; dviñanti-hate; ye-who; na-not; jätu'ever; bhavitä-will be; teñäm- virahaù-separation; nirayaiù-from hell; saha-with.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

For they who in their hearts hate the residnets of Mathura' the tortures of hell will not cease.

 

Text 325

 

mathurä-väsinäà kurvanty upakärän manäg api

ye loka nästi teñäà hi

puëyasyäntaù kadäcana

mathurä-väsinäm-of the residents of Mathurä; kurvanti-do; upakärän-help; manäg-slightly; api-even; ye-who; lokäh-people; na-not; asti'is; teñäm-of them; hi-indeed; puëyasya-of piety; antaù'end; kadäcana-ever.

 

The piety gained by they who, even slightly, help the residents of Mathura', will never end.

 

Text 326

 

pädme pätäla-khaëòe

dhanyä mathurä-väsäs te

vasanti hari-sannidhau

catur-varëa-varaù so 'yaà

pibate yamunä-jalam

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; dhanyäh-fortunate; mathurä-väsäù-residents of Mathurä; te-they; vasanti-reside; hari-sannidhau-near Lord Hari; catur-varëa-varaù-best of the four varnas; saù ayam-he; pibate-drinks; yamunä-jalam-Yamuna' water.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

The residents of Mathura' are fortunate, for they live near Lord Hari. A person who drinks the water of the Yamuna' belongs to the best of the four varëas.

 

Text 327

 

svapacäù pavanäs te 'tra

vasanti mathurä-pure

anya-deça-stha-vipräëäà

mathurä-väsino 'dhikäù

svapacäù-dogeaters; pavanäù-purified; te-they; atra-here; vasanti-reside; mathurä-pure'in Mathurä; anya-deça-stha-in another country; vipräëäm-brähmaëas; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; adhikäù-greater.

 

Dogeaters who live in Mathura' City become purified. The ordinary people of Mathura' are better than the brähmaëas in other places.

 

Text 328

tatraiva nirväëa-khaëòe

mathurä-väsino dhanyä

manyä api divaukasäm

agaëya-mahimänas te

sarva eva catur-bhujäù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvana-khaëòa; mathurä-väsinaù-the residents of Mathurä; dhanyäh-fortunate; manyäh-glorious; api'also; divaukasäm-of the residents of heaven; agaëya-measureless; mahimänaù-glories; te-they; sarve-all;; eva-indeed; catur-bhujäù-with four arms.

 

In the same scripture, in the Nirvana-khaëòa, it is said:

The residents of Mathura' are fortunate. They are more exalted than the demigods in heaven. Their glories cannot be counted. They are all four-armed residents of Vaikuëöha.

 

Text 329

 

mathurä-väsinäà ye tu

doñaà paçyanti mänaväù

te sva-doñaà na paçyanti

janma-måtyu-sahasra-dam

mathurä-väsinäm-residents of Mathurä; ye-who; tu-indeed; doñam-fault; paçyanti-see; mänaväù-people; te-they; sva-doñam-own fault; na-not; paçyanti-see; janma-births; måtyu-and deaths; sahasra-thousands; dam-giving.

 

People who see fault in the residents of Mathura' do not see their own mistake, which will bring them thousands of births and deaths.

 

Text 330

 

taträdi-väräha-mataà madhuvanaà purädbhir apy astéti. tathä hi

tena dåñöä ca sä ramyä

väsavasya puré yathä

vanair dvädaçabhir yuktä

puëya päpa-harä çubhä

tatra-there; ädi-väräha-matam-the opinion of Ädi-varäha Puräëa; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; purädbhir-with the floods; api-even; asti-is; iti-thus; tathä'so; hi-indeed; tena-by him; dåñöä-seen; ca-and; sä-it; ramyä-charming; väsavasya-of Indra; puré'the city; yathä-as; vanair-with forests; dvädaçabhir-12; yuktä-endowed; puëya-sacred; päpa-harä'removing sins; çubhä-auspicious.

 

The Ädi-varäha Puräëa considers that the forest of Madhuvana continues to exist after the great flood of cosmé devastation. It further says:

For one who sees sacred and auspicious Mathurä, which has twelve forests, and which destroys sins, it is as beautiful as Indra's capitol.

 

Text 331

 

atha dvädaça-vananaà mähätmyam. tatra madhuvanasya

ramyaà madhuvanaà näma

viñëu-sthänam anuttamam

yad dåñövä manujo devi

sarvän kamän aväpnuyät

atha-now; dvädaça-vananam-of the 12 forests; mähätmyam-glorification; tatra-there; madhuvanasya-of Madhuvana; ramyam-charming; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; näma-named; viñëu-sthänam-Viñëu's place; anuttamam-peerless; yad-which; dåñövä-having seen; manujaù-a person; devi-O goddess; sarvän-all; kamän-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.

 

Glorification of Mathurä's Twelve Forests

Glorification of of Madhuvana

O goddess, a person who sees Lord Viñëu's beautiful and peerless abode of Madhuvana, attains all his desires.

 

Text 332

 

tälavanasya. ädi-värähe

vanaà tälavanäkhyaà ca

dvitéyaà vanam uttamam

yatra snätvä naro devi

kåta-kåtyo 'bhijäyate

tälavanasya-of Talavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; vanam- tälavanäkhyam-Talavana forest; ca-and; dvitéyam-second; vanam-forest; uttamam-transcendental; yatra-where; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; kåta-kåtyaù-successful; abhijäyate-becomes.

 

Glorification of Tälavana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The second forest is transcendental Tälavana. O goddess, a person who bathes there attains all success.

 

Text 333

 

tatra kuëòaà svaccha-jalaà

nélotpala-vibhüñitam

tatra snänena dänena

väïchitaà phalam äpnuyät

tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; svaccha-clear; jalam-water; nélotpala-with blue lotuses; vibhüñitam-ornamented; tatra-there; snänena-by bathing; dänena-by charity; väïchitam-desired; phalam-result; äpnuyät-attains.

 

The clear-water lake there is decorated with blue lotuses. By bathing there or giving charity there, one attains his desire.

 

Text 334

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

aho talavanaà puëyaà

yatra tälair hato 'suraù

hitäya yädavänäà ca

ätma-kréòaëakäya ca

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; talavanam-Talavana; puëyam-sacred; yatra-where; tälair-by tala trees; hataù-killed; asuraù-demon; hitäya-for the welfare; yädavänäm-of the Yädavas; ca-and; ätma-kréòaëakäya-for pastimes; ca-and.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

This is sacred Talavana where, to help the Lord's pastimes and to benefit the Yädavas, a demon was killed by palm trees,.

 

Text 335

 

yas tatra kurute snänaà

yatra kutra sthite jale

yädavatvaà aväpnoti

dehänte deva-darçanam

yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; yatra-where; kutra-where?; sthite-sitauted; jale'water; yädavatvam-the state of being a Yädava; aväpnoti-attains; deha-of the body; ante-at the end; deva-of the Lord; darçanam-the sight.

A person who bathes in the waters there becomes, at the end of his body, a Yädava who personally sees the Lord.

 

Text 336

 

kumudavanasyädi-värähe

vanaà kumudvanäkhyaà ca

tåtéyam uttamaà param

tatra gatvä naro devi

kåta-kåtyo 'bhijäyate

kumudavanasya-of Kumudavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; vanam- kumudvanäkhyam-Kumudavana; ca-and; tåtéyam'third; uttamam-supreme; param-next; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; kåta-kåtyaù-successful; abhijäyate-becomes.

 

Glorification of Kumudavana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The third forest is transcendental Kumudavana. O goddess, a person who goes there attains all success.

 

Text 337

 

kämyavanasyädi-värähe

caturthaà kämyakavanaà

vanänäà vanam uttamam

tatra gatvä naro devi

mama loke mahéyate

kämyavanasya-of Kamyavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; caturtham-the fourth; kämyakavanam-Kamayavana» vanänäm- vanam uttamam-the best of forests; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

Glorification of Kämyavana

The fourth is Kämyavana, the best of all forests. O goddess, a person who goes there is glorified in My abode.

 

Text 338

 

vimalasya ca kuëòe tu

sarvaà päpaà vimokñyate

yas tatra muïcati präëän

mama lokaà sa gacchati

vimalasya-pure; ca-and; kuëòe-in the lake; tu-indeed; sarvam-all; päpam-sin; vimokñyate-free; yaù-who; tatra-there; muïcati-gives up; präëän-life; mama-My; lokam-abode; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

In nearby Vimala-kuëòa one becomes free from all sins and, when leaving this life, goes to My abode.

 

Text 339

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

tataù kämyavanaà räjan

yatra bälye sthito hariù

snäna-mätreëa sarveñäà

sarva-käma-phala-pradam

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tataù-then; kämyavanam-Kamayavana; räjan'O king; yatra-where; bälye-in childhood; sthitaù-situated; hariù-Hari; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; sarveñäm-of all; sarva-käma-phala-pradam-granting all desires.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura-khaëòa, it is said:

O king, next is Kämyavana, where Lord Hari stayed in His childhood. Simply by bathing here, any person will attain all his desires.

 

Text 340

 

tatra käma-saro räjan

gopikä-ramaëaà saraù

tatra tértha-sahasräëi

saräàsi ca påthak påthak

tatra-there; käma-saraù-Kama-sarivara; räjan-O king; gopikä-ramaëam- saraù-Gopikaramana-sarovara; tatra-there; tértha-sahasräëi-thousands of holy places; saräàsi-lakes; ca-and; påthak påthak-variously.

 

In that place are Käma-sarovara, Gopikäramaëa-sarovara, many other lakes, and thousands of holy places.

 

Text 341

 

bahulävanasyädi-värähe

païcamaà bähulavanaà

vanänäà vanam uttamam

tatra gatvä naro devi

agni-sthänaà sa gacchati

bahulävanasya-of Bahulavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; païcamam-the fifth; bähulavanam-Bahulavana; vanänäm- vanam uttamam-the best of forests; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; agni-sthänam-Agniloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

Glorification of Bahulävana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The fifth forest is Bahulävana, the best of forests. O goddess, a person who goes there attains Agniloka

 

Text 342

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

bahulä çri-hareù patné

tatra tiñöhati sarvadä

tasmin padmavane räjan

bahu-puëya-phaläni ca

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; bahulä-Bahulä; çri-hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; patné'wife; tatra-there; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-always; tasmin-there; padmavane-ina forest of lotuses; räjan-O king; bahu-puëya-phaläni-many pious results; ca-and.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

Lord Hari's wife Bahula' stays there always. O king, in the forest of lotus flowers there one attains the result of many pious deeds.

 

Text 343

 

tatraiva ramate viñëur

lakñmyä särdhaà sadaiva hi

tatra saìkarñaëaà kuëòam

tatra mäna-saro nåpa

tatra-there; eva-indeed; ramate-enjoys; viñëur-Viñëu; lakñmyä särdham-with Lakñmé; sadä-always; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; tatra-there; saìkarñaëam- kuëòam-Sankarsana-kuëòa; tatra-there; mäna-saraù-Mana-sarovara; nåpa-O king.

 

There Lord Viñëu enjoys pastimes with Lakñmé eternally. In that place is Saìkarñaëa-kuëòa. In that place is Mäna-sarovara, O king.

 

Text 344

 

yas tatra kurute snänaà

madhu-mäse nåpottamäsa paçyati harià tatra

lakñmyä saha viçämpate

yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; madhu-mäse-in the month opf Caitra; nåpottama-O king; sah-he» paçyati-sees; harim-Kåñëa; tatra-there; lakñmyä saha-with Lakñmé; viçämpate-O king.

 

O king, a person who bathes there during the month of Caitra (March-April, sees Lord Viñëu and Lakñmé there.

 

Text 345

 

bhadravanasyädi-värähe

tasmin bhadravanaà näma

ñañöhaà ca vanam uttamam

tatra gatvä tu vasudhe

mad-bhakto mat-paräyaëaù

tad vanasya prabhävena

nägalokaà sa gacchati

bhadravanasya-of Bhadravana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tasmin-there; bhadravanam-Bhadravana; näma-named; ñañöham-sxith; ca-and; vanam-forest; uttamam-transcendental; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; mad-bhaktaù-My devotee; mat-paräyaëaù-devoted to Me; tad vanasya-of that forest; prabhävena-by the power; nägalokam-to Nagaloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

Glorification of Bhadravana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Bhadravana is the sixth transcendental forest. O earth-goddess, a devotee attached to Me who goes there, goes to Nägaloka by the power of that forest.

 

Text 346

 

khadiravanasyädi-värähe

saptamaà tu vanaà bhümau

khädiraà loka-viçrutam

tatra gatvä naro bhadre

mama lokaà sa gacchati

khadiravanasya-of Kadiravana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; saptamam-seventh; tu-indeed; vanam- -forest; bhümau-on the earth; khädiram-Kadira; loka-viçrutam-famous in the world; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; bhadre-O auspicious one; mama-My; lokam-abode; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

 

Glorification of Khadiravana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The sixth forest is famous on the earth as Khadiravana. O auspicious one, a person who goes there will go to My abode.

 

Text 347

 

mahävanasyädi-värähe

mahävanaà cäñöamaà tu

sadaiva hi mama priyam

tasmin gatvä tu manuja

indraloke mahéyate

mahävanasya-of Mahavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mahävanam-Mahavana; ca-and; añöamam-eighth; tu-indeed; sadä-always; eva hi-indeed; mama-My; priyam-dear; tasmin-there; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; manujah-a person; indraloke-Indraloka; mahéyate-is glorified.

 

Glorification of Mahävana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The eighth forest is Mahävana, which is very dear to Me. A person who goes there is glorified on Indraloka.

 

Text 348

 

yamalärjuna-térthaà ca

kuëòaà tatra ca vartate

paryastaà yatra çakaöaà

bhinna-bhäëòa-kuöé-ghatam

yamalärjuna-tértham-Yamalarjuna-tértha; ca-and; kuëòam-lake; tatra-there; ca-and; vartate-is; paryastam-overturned; yatra-where; çakaöam-the cart; bhinna-broken; bhäëòa-kuöé-ghatam-pots and pans.

 

In that place are Yamalärjuna-tértha and Yamalärjuna-kuëòa. In that place is the place where the cart was overturned and the pots and pans were broken.

 

Text 349

 

tatra snänopaväsena

anantaà phalam äpnuyäötatra gopéçvaro näma

mahä-pätaka-näçanaù

tatra-there; snäna-by bathing; upaväsena-and fasting; anantam-limitless; phalam-result; äpnuyät-attains; tatra-there; gopéçvaraù-Gopisvara; näma-named; mahä-pätaka-näçanaù-destroying great sins.

 

By fasting and bathing in that place one attains a limitless result. The Deity Gopéçvara there destroys great sins.

 

Text 350

 

sapta-sämudrikaà näma

kuëòaà tu vimalodakam

devasyägre tu vasudhe

gopéçasya mahätmanaù

sapta-sämudrikam- näma kuëòam-Sapta-samudrika-kuëòa; tu-indeed; vimalodakam-with clear water; devasya-the Deity; agre-before; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; gopéçasya mahätmanaù-of Lord Gopéçvara.

 

O earth-goddess, before the Deity of Lord Gopéçvara is a clear-water lake named Saptasämudrika-kuëòa.

 

Text 351

 

pitaraç cäbhinandanti

päniyaà piëòaà eva ca

soma-väre tö amävasyäà

piëòa-dänaà karoti yaù

gayä-piëòaà pradänaà ca

kåtaà nästy atra saàçayaù

pitaraù-the pitäs; ca-and; abhinandanti-rejoice; päniyam-water; piëòam-piëòa; eva-indeed; ca-and; soma-vare-on Monday; tö amävasyäm-on the new-moon day; piëòa-of piëòa; dänam-offering; karoti-does; yaù-who; gayä-piëòam-piëòa at Gayä; pradänam-offering; ca-and; kåtam-done; na-not; asti-is; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

The pitäs enjoy water and piëòa there. A person who on a Monday new-moon day offers piëòa there, offers piëòa at Gayä. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 352

 

lohajaìghavanasyädi-värähe

lohajaìghavanaà näma

lohajaìghena rakñitamnavamaà tu vanaà devi

sarva-pätaka-näçanam

lohajaìghavanasya-of Lohajaìghavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; lohajaìghavanam- näma-named Lohajaìghavana; lohajaìghena-by Lohajaìgha; rakñitam-protected; navamam-ninth; tu-indeed; vanam-forest; devi-O goddess; sarva-of all; pätaka-sins; näçanam-destruction.

 

Glorification of Lohajaìghavana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O goddess, Lohajaìghavana, which was protected by Lohajaìghäsura, and which destroys all sins, is the ninth forest.

 

Text 353

 

bilvavanasya

vanaà bilvavanaà näma

daçamaà deva-püjitam

tatra gatvä tu manujo

brahmaloke mahéyate

bilvavanasya-of Blivavana; vanam- bilvavanam- näma-the forest named Blivavana; daçamam-tenth; deva-by the demigodsl; püjitam-worshiped; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; manujaù-a person; brahmaloke-in Brahmaloka; mahéyate-glorified.

 

Glorification of Bilvavana

The forest named Bilvavana, which is worshiped by the demigods, is the tenth forest. A person who goes there is glorified on Brahmaloka.

 

Text 354

 

bhäëòéravanasya

ekädaçaà tu bhäëòéraà

yoginäà priyam uttamam

tasya darçana-mätreëa

naro garbhaà na gacchati

bhäëòéravanasya-of Bhäëòéravana; ekädaçam- tu-indeed; bhäëòéram-Bhäëòéra; yoginäm-of the yogis; priyam-dear; uttamam-most; tasya-of that» darçana-by seeing; mätreëa-only; naraù-a person; garbham-a mother's womb;û na-not; gacchati-goes.

 

Glorification of Bhäëòéravanä

The eleventh forest is Bhäëòéravana, which is very dear to the yogés. Simply by seeing it, a person will never again enter a mother's womb.

 

Text 355

 

bhäëòéraà samanupräpya

vanänäà vanam uttamam

väsudevaà tato dåñövä

punar-janma na vidyate

bhäëòéram-Bhäëòéra; samanupräpya-attaining; vanänäm-of forests; vanam-forest; uttamam-best; väsudevam-Lord Väsudeva; tataù-then; dåñövä-having seen; punar-again; janma-birth; na-not; vidyate-is.

 

A person who visits Bhäëòéravana, the best of forests, and sees the Deity of Lord Väsudeva there, never takes birth again.

 

Text 356

 

tasmin bhäëòérake snätvä

samyato niyatäçanaù

sarva-päpa-vinirmukta

indralokaà sa gacchati

tasmin-there; bhäëòérake-in Bhäëòéravana; snätvä-having bathed; samyataù-controlling the senses; niyatäçanaù'fasting; sarva-päpa-all sins;vinirmuktah-free; indralokam-Indra's abode; saù-he; gacchati-goes.

 

A person who, fasting and controlling his senses, bathes in Bhäëòéravana, becomes free of all sins and goes to Indraloka.

 

Text 357

 

çri-våndävanasyädi-värähe

våndävanaà dvädaçamaà

våndayä parirakñitam

mama caiva priyaà bhüme

sarva-pätaka-näçanam

çri-våndävanasya-of Våndävana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; våndävanam-Våndävana; dvädaçamam-twelfth; våndayä-by Vånda'-devé; parirakñitam'protected; mama-My; ca-and; eva-indeed; priyam-favorite; bhüme-on the earth; sarva-all; pätaka-sins; näçanam-destroying.

 

Glorification of Çré Våndävana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

The twelfth forest is Våndävana, which is protected by Våndä-devi, and which destroys all sins, O earth-goddess, it is My favorite.

 

Text 358

 

taträhaà kréòayiñyämi

gopé-gopälakaiù saha

su-ramyaà su-pratétaà ca

deva-dänava-durlabham

tatra-there; aham-I; kréòayiñyämi-will enjoy pastimes; gopé-with the gopés; gopälakaiù-and gopas; saha-with; su-ramyam-very charming; su-pratétam-very famous; ca-and; deva-for the devas; dänava-and danavas; durlabham-difficult to attain.

 

It is very beautiful and very famous. The devas and dänavas can attain it only with great difficulty. There I will enjoy pastimes with the gopas and gopés.

 

Text 359

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

tato våndävanaà puëyaà

våndä-devi-samäçritam

hariëädhiñöhitaà tä ca

rudra-brahmädi-sevitam

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tataù-then; våndävanam-Våndävana; puëyam-sacred; våndä-devé-by Våndä-devé; samäçritam-sheltered; hariëä-by Lord Hari; adhiñöhitam-resided; tat-that; ca-and; rudra-brahma-ädi-by the demigods headed by Brahma' and Çiva; sevitam-served.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

Next is sacred Våndävana, where Lord Hari resides. It is protected by Våndä-devi and served by Brahma, Çiva, and the demigods.

 

Text 360

 

våndävanaà su-gahanaà

viçälaà viståtaà bahu

munénäm açramaiù pürëaà

vanya-våndä-samänvitam

våndävanam-Våndävana; su-gahanam-very dense; viçälam-large; viståtam-expanded; bahu-great; munénäm'of sages; açramaiù-with açramas; pürëam-filled; vanya-våndä-with creatures and flowers of the forest; samänvitam-filled.

Våndävana is very large and dense. It is filled with sages' äçramas. It is filled with the creatures and flowers of the forest.

Text 361

 

yathä lakñméù priyatamä

yathä bhakti-parä naräù

govindasya priyatamaà

tathä våndävanaà bhuvi

yathä-as; lakñméù-the goddess of fortune; priyatamä-most dear; yathä-as; bhakti-parä naräù-the devotees; govindasya-of Govinda; priyatamam-most dear; tathä-in that way; våndävanam-Våndävana; bhuvi-on the earth.

 

As Lakñmé-devé is dear, and as the devotees are dear, so in this world is Våndävana dear to Lord Govinda.

 

Text 362

 

vatsair vatsa-tarébhiç ca

säkaà kréòati mädhavaù

våndävanäntara-gataù

sa-ramair bälakävåtaù

vatsair-with calves; vatsa-tarébhiù-cows; ca-and; säkam-with; kréòati-plays; mädhavaù-Kåñëa; våndävanäntara-gataù-in Våndävana; sa-ramair-with Balaräma; bälaka-by the boys; ävåtaù-accompanied.

 

In Våndävana Lord Mädhava enjoys pastimes with the cows, calves, boys, and Balaräma.

 

Text 363

 

aho våndävanaà ramyaà

yatra govardhano giriù

yatra térthäny anekäni

viñëudeva-kåtäni ca

ahaù-Oh; våndävanam-Våndävana; ramyam-charming; yatra-where; govardhano giriù-Govardhana Hill; yatra-where; térthäni-sacred places; anekäni-many; viñëudeva-kåtäni-made by Lord Viñëu; ca-and.

 

Oh, Våndävana is beautiful with Govardhana Hill and with many holy places made sacred by Lord Viñëu.

Text 364

 

pädme nirväëa-khaëòe

paramänanda-kandäkhyaà

mahä-pätaka-näçanam

samasta-duùkha-samhantå-

jéva-mätra-vimuktidam

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; nirväëa-khaëòe-Nirväëa-khaëòa; paramänanda-kanda-äkhyam-known as the source of transcendental bliss; mahä-pätaka-näçanam-destroying great sins; samasta-duùkha-samhantå-destroying all sufferings; jéva-mätra-vimuktidam-giving liberation to the living entities.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Nirväëa-khaëòa, it is said:

Våndävana is filled with transcendental bliss. It destroys the greatest sins. It ends all sufferings. Simply living within it grants liberation.

 

Text 365

 

çré-daçama-skande

vanaà våndävanaà näma

paçavyaà nava-känanam

gopa-gopé-gaväà sevyaà

puëyädri-tåëa-vérudham

çré-daçama-skande-in the Tenth Canto of Çrémad-Bhägavatam; vanaà-another forest; våndävanaà näma-named Våndävana; paçavyaà-a very suitable place for maintenance of the cows ad other animals; nava-känanam-there are many new gardenlike places; gopa-gopé-gaväà-for all the cowherd men, the members of their families, and the cows; sevyaà-a very happy, very suitable place; puëya-adri-there are nice mountains; tåëa-plants; vérudham-and creepers.

In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.11.28, it is said:

Between Nandéçvara and Mahavana is a place named Våndävana. This place is very suitable because it is lush with grass, plants and creepers for the cows and other animals. It has nice gardens and tall mountains and is full of facilities for the happiness of all the gopas and gopés and our animals.*

 

Text 366

 

våndävanaà sakhi bhuvo vitanoti kértià

yad devaké-suta-padämbuja-labdha-lakñméù

govinda-veëum anu-matta-mayüra-nåtyaà

prekñyädri-sänv-avataräny asamasta-sattvam

våndävanam-Våndävana; sakhi-O friend; bhuvaù-of the earth; vitanoti-expands; kértim-the fame; yad'which; devaké-suta-of Devaké's son;pada-ambuja-lotus feet; labdha-attained; lakñméù-opulence; govinda-of Kåñëa; veëum-the flute; anu-following; matta-maddened; mayüra-peacocks; nåtyam-dancing; prekñya-seeing; adri-of the hill; sänv-on the top; avataräny asamasta-sattvam-not possible for others.

 

In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.21.10, it is also said:

Dear friends, our Våndävana is proclaiming the glories of this entire earth because this planet is glorified by the lotus footprints of the son of Devaké. Besides that, when Govinda plays His flute, the peacocks immediately become mad. When all the animals and trees and plants, either on the top of Govardhana Hill or in the valley, see the dancing of the peacock, they all stand still and listen to the transcendental sound of the flute with great attention. We think that this boon is not possible or available on any other planet.*

 

Text 367

 

etena våndävanasya loka-prasiddhyä ñodaça-kroçi-vistäratvaà yuktam eva. çri-govinda-våndävanäkhye båhad-gautaméya-tantre tö idaà dåçyate. tatra närada-praçno yathä

kim idaà dvädaçabhikhyaà

våndäraëyaà viçämpate

çrotum icchämi bhagavan

yadi yogyo 'sti me vada

etena-by this; våndävanasya-of Våndävana; loka-in the world; prasiddhyä-by the fame; ñodaça-kroçi-vistäratvam-16 kroças in size; yuktam-proper; eva-indeed; çri-govinda-våndävana-äkhye-in the Govinda-Våndävana-çästra; båhad-gautaméya-tantre'in teh Båhad-gautaméya Tantra; tu-indeed; idam-this; dåçyate-is seen; tatra-there; närada-of Närada; praçnaù-the question; yathä-as; kim-what?; idam-this; dvädaçäbhikhyaàknown as the twelfth; våndäraëyam-Våndävana; viçämpate-O king; çrotum-to hear; icchämi-I wish; bhagavan-O Lord; yadi-if;û yogyaù-proper; asti-is; me-for me. vada

 

Våndävana is famous in this world as being 16 kroças (32 size. This is seen in the Çré Govinda-Våndävana-çästra and the Båhad-Gautaméya-tantra. In that scripture Närada asks the following question:

 

What is Våndävana, which is named here as the twelfth forest? I desire to hear of it. O Lord, if You think it is right, please tell me of it.

 

Text 368

 

tatra çri-kåñëasyottaram

idaà våndävanaà ramyaà

mama dhämaiva kevalam

atra ye paçavaù pakñi-

våkña-kéöa-narämaräù

ye ca santi mamädhiñöhe

måtä yänti mamälayam

tatra-there; çri-kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; uttaram-answer; idam-this; våndävanam-Våndävana; ramyam-beautiful; mama-My; dhäma-abode; eva-indeed; kevalam-transcendental; atra-here; ye-who; paçavaù-animals; pakñi-birds; våkña-trees; kéöa-insects and words; nara-humans; amaräù-demigods; ye-who; ca-and; santi-are; mama-My; adhiñöhe-stay; måtäù-after death; yänti-attain; mama-My; alayam-abode.

 

Lord Kåñëa answered:

Beautiful Våndävana is My transcendental abode. The beasts, birds, trees, insects, worms, humans, and demigods who stay here with Me will all go, when they die, to My own abode.

 

Text 369

 

atra ye gopa-kanyäç ca

nivasanti mamälaye

yoginyas tä mayä nityaà

mama seva-paräyaëäù

atra-here; ye-who; gopa-kanyäù-gopés; ca-and; nivasanti-reside; mama-My; alaye-in the abode; yoginyaù-yoginés; täh-they; mayä-by Me; nityam-eternally; mama-My; seva-to the service; paräyaëäù-devoted.

 

The gopés who reside here in My abode and serve Me with devotion stay eternally by My side.

 

Text 370

 

païca-yojanam evästi

vanaà me deha-rüpakam

kälindéyaà suñumëäkhyä

paramämåta-vähiné

atra deväç ca bhütäni

vartante sükñma-rüpataù

païca-yojanam-five yojanas; eva-indeed; asti-is; vanam-forest; me-My; deha-rüpakam-form;û kälindéyam-in the Yamunä; suñumna-äkhyäh-named Suñumëä; parama-amåta-vähiné-a river of nectar; atra-here; deväù-demigods; ca-and; bhütäni-sages; vartante-are; sükñma-in subtle; rüpataù-forms.

 

This forest of five yojanas (40 miles, is My body. This Yamunä is the Suñumnä River that flows with nectar. The demigods and sages stay here in subtle forms.

 

Text 371

 

sarva-deva-mayaç cähaà

na tyajämi vanaà kvacit

ävirbhävas tirobhävo

bhaved atra yuge yuge

tejomayam idaà ramyam

adåçyaà carma-cakñusä

sarva-deva-mayaù-the personification of all the demigods; ca-and; aham-I; na-not; tyajämi-leave; vanam-forest; kvacit-somewhere; ävirbhävaù-appearance;û tirobhävaù-disappearance; bhaved-is; atra-here; yuge yuge-milleneium after millenium; tejomayam-splendid; idam-this; ramyam-charming; adåçyam-invisible; carma-f flesh; cakñusä-eyes.

 

I, who am the personification of all the demigods, never leave this forest. Millenium after millenium I appear and disappear. This splendidly beautiful forest then becomes invisible to material eyes.

 

Text 372

 

atha çri-govindasyädi-värähe

våndävane ca govindaà

ye paçyanti vasundhare

na te yama-purià yänti

yänti puëya-kåtäà gatim

atha-now; çri-govindasya-of Lord Govinda; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; våndävane-in Våndävana; ca-and; govindam-Lord Govinda; ye-who; paçyanti-see; vasundhare'O earth; na-not; te-they; yama-purim-Yama's city; yänti-attain; yänti'they go; puëya-kåtäm-of the pure; gatim-to the destination.

 

Glorification of the Çré Govinda Deity

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O earth-goddess, they who see the Govinda Deity in Våndävana do not go to Yamaräja's city. They go to the place where pure-hearted saints go.

 

Text 373

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe çri-näradoktau

tasmin våndävane puëyaà

govindasya niketanam

tat-sevaka-samakérëaà

tatraiva sthéyate mayä

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; çri-närada-uktau-in Närada's words; tasmin-in this; våndävane-Våndävana; puëyam-sacred; govindasya-of Govinda; niketanam-the temple; tat-sevaka-His servants; samakérëam-assembled; tatra-there; eva-indeed; sthéyate-is stood; mayä-by me.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, Çré Närada says:

In Våndävana is the sacred temple of Lord Govinda. When His servants are assembled, I stand among them.

 

Text 374

 

bhuvi govinda-vaikuëöhaà

tasmin våndävane nåpa

yatra våndädayo bhåtyäù

santi govinda-manasaù

bhuvi-on the earth; govinda-vaikuëöham-Lord Govinda's Vaikuëöha abode; tasmin-in that; våndävane-Våndävana;û nåpa-O king; yatra-where; våndä-ädayaù-beginning with Vånda'-devé; bhåtyäù-servants; santi-are; govinda-manasaù-their hearts fixed on Lord Govinda.

 

O king, Våndävana, where Våndä-devi and others whose hearts are fixed on Lord Govinda stay, is Lord Govinda's Vaikuëöha abode on this earth.

 

Text 375

 

våndävane mahä-sadma

yair dåñöaà puruñottamaiù

govindasya mahé-päla

te kåtärthä mahé-tale

våndävane-in Våndävana; mahä-sadma-great abode; yair-by whom; dåñöam-seen; puruña-uttamaiù-by great souls; govindasya-of Lord Govinda; mahé-päla-O king; te-they; kåtärthäh-successful; mahé-tale-on the earth.

 

O king, the great souls who see Lord Govinda's temple in Våndävana have attained all success on this earth.

 

Text 376

 

atha çri-govinda-térthasya saura-puräne

govinda-svämi-térthäkhyam

asti térthaà mahottamam

vasudeva-tanüjasya

viñëor atyanta-vallabham

atha-now; çri-govinda-térthasya-of Çré Govinda-tértha; saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; govinda-svämi-térthäkhyam-named Govindasvämi-tértha; asti-is; tértham-a holy place; mahä-uttamam-great; vasudeva-of Vasudeva; tanüjasya-of the son; viñëor-of Lord Viñëu;û atyanta-vallabham-very dear.

 

Glorification of Govinda-tértha

In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

The great holy place named Govindasvämi-tértha is very dear to Lord Viñëu, who became the son of King Vasudeva.

 

Text 377

 

govinda-svämi-nämatra

vasaty arcätmako 'cyutaù

tatra snätvä tam abhyarcya

muktim icchanti sädhavaù

govinda-svämi-näma-named Govinda-svämé; atra-here; vasati-resides; arcätmakaù-Deity; acyutaù-Acyuta; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; tam-Him; abhyarcya-having worshiped; muktim-liberation» icchanti-desire; sädhavaù-saints.

 

Here Lord Acyuta's Deity of Lord Govindasvämé resides. The saintly devotees bathe nearby, worship the Deity, and yearn for release from the world of birth and death.

 

Text 378-379

 

atha çri-brahma-kuëòasyädi-värähe

tatra brähme mahä-bhäge

bahu-gulma-latävåtetatra snänaà prakurvéta

eka-rätroñito naraù

gandharvair apsarobhiç ca

kréòamänaù sa modate

tathätra muïcate präëän

mama lokaà sa gacchati

atha-now; çri-brahma-kuëòasya-of Brahma-kuëòa; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there; brähme-in Brahma-kuëòa; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; bahu-gulma-latäv-with many trees and vines; ävåte-filled; tatra-there; snänam-bath; prakurvéta-does; eka-rätra-for one night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; gandharvair-with Gandharvas; apsarobhiù-apsaräs; ca-and; kréòamänaù-playing; sah-he; modate-enjoys; tathä-so; atra-here; muïcate'is liberated; präëän-from life; mama-My; lokam-abode; saù-he; gacchati-goes.

 

Glorification of Brahma-kuëòa

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

A person who, fasting for the night, bathes in beautiful Brahma-kuëòa, which is surrounded by many trees and vines, enjoys pastimes with the Gandharvas and Apsaräs. Leaving this life here, he goes to My abode.

 

Text 380

 

skände

tatra kuëòaà mahä-bhäge

bahu-gulma-latävåtam

puëyam eva mahä-térthaà

su-ramya-salilävåtam

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; bahu-gulma-latä-ävåtam-surrounded with trees and vines; puëyam-sacred; eva-indeed; mahä-tértham-great holy place; su-ramya-charming; salila-with water; ävåtam-filled.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

O auspicious one, in this place is a very sacred lake with beautiful waters surrounded by many trees and vines.

 

Text 381

tatra snänaà prakurvéta

catuù-käloñito naraù

modate vimale divye

gandharvänäà kule sukham

tatra-there; snänam-a bath; prakurvéta-does; catuù-käla-four times; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; modate-enjoys; vimale-in the pure; divye-splendid world; gandharvänäm-of Gandharvas; kule'in the community; sukham-happiness.

 

A person who fasts and bathes here four times, enjoys in the community of Gandharvas in the splendid heavenly world.

 

Text 382

 

taträpi muïcate präëän

satataà kåta-niçcayaù

gandharva-kulam utsåjya

mama lokaà sa gacchati

tatra-there; api-also; muïcate-gives up; präëän-life; satatam-always; kåta-niçcayaù-determined; gandharva-kulam-in the community of Gandharvas; utsåjya-giving up; mama-My; lokam-abode; saù-he; gacchati-goes.

 

A person who stays here with determination and departs from this life here, leaves the company of the Gandharvas and goes to My abode.

 

Text 383

 

taträçcaryaà pravakñyämi

tat çåëusva vasundhare

labhante manujäù siddhià

mama käryä-paräyaëäù

tatra-there; äçcaryam-a wonder; pravakñyämi-I will tell; tat-this; çåëusva-please listen; vasundhare'O earth; labhante-attain; manujäù-people; siddhim-perfection; mama-My; käryä-paräyaëäù-devoted to the service.

 

O earth-goddess, listen and I will tell you something wonderful: They who devotedly serve Me in this place attain the supreme perfection.

 

Text 384-385

 

tasya tatrottara-pärçve

'çoka-våkñaù sita-prabhaù

vaiçäkhasya tu mäsasya

çukla-pakñasya dvädaçé

sa puñpati ca madhyähne

mama bhaktasukhävahaù

na kaçcid abhijänäti

vinä bhägavataà çucim

tasya-of this; tatra-there uttara-pärçve-north; açoka-våkñaù'an açoka tree; sita-prabhaù-white; vaiçäkhasya-of Vaisakha; tu-indeed; mäsasya-of the month; çukla-pakñasya dvädaçé-on the çukla-dvädaçé; sah-it; puñpati-blooms; ca-and; madhyähne-in mid-day; mama-My; bhakta-devottes; sukhävahaù-bringing happiness; na-not; kaçcid-anyone; abhijänäti-knows; vinä-except; bhägavatam-devotee; çucim-pure.

 

North of this place is a white asoka tree that in the month of Vaiçäkha (April-May,, on the çukla-dvädaçé, at noon, suddenly bursts into full bloom. Except for My pure devotee, no one can understand how this happens.

 

Text 386

 

atha keçi-térthasyädi-värähe

gaìgä çata-guëaà puëyaà

yatra keçé nipatitaù

taträpi ca viçeño 'sti

keçi-térthe vasundhare

tasmin piëòa-pradänena

gayä-piëòa-phalaà labhet

atha-now; keçi-térthasya-of Keçi-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; gaìgä-the Ganges; çata-guëam-a hundred times; puëyam-sacred; yatra-where; keçé-Keçé; nipatitaù-died; tatra-there; api-also; ca-and; viçeñaù-specific; asti-is; keçi-térthe-in Keçi-tértha; vasundhare-O earth; tasmin-there; piëòa-pradänena'by offering piëòa; gayä-piëòa-phalam-result of offering piëòa in Gayä; labhet-attains.

 

Glorification of Keçi-tértha

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Keçi-tértha, the place where Keçé died, is a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges. By offering piëòa in Keçi-tértha one attains the result of offering piëòa in Gayä.

 

Text 387

 

atha käliya-hradasya tatraiva

käliyasya hradaà gatvä kréòäà kåtvä vasundhare

snäna-mätreëa tatraiva

sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

atha-now; käliya-hradasya-of Käliya-hrada; tatra-there; eva-indeed; käliyasya hradam-Käliya-hrada» gatvä-having gone; kréòäm-pastimes; kåtvä-having done; vasundhare-O earth; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; tatra-there; eva-indeed; sarva-päpaiù-of all sins; pramucyate-becomes freed.

 

Glorification of Käliya-hrada

In the same scripture it is said:

O earth-goddess, a person who goes to Käliya-hrada, bathes there and plays in the water, simply by bathing becomes freed from all sins.

 

Text 388

 

värähe

käliyasya hradaà puëyam

asti guhyaà paraà mama

yaträhaà kréòaye nityaà

vimale yamunämbhasi

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; käliyasya hradam-Käliya-hrada; puëyam-sacred; asti-is; guhyam-secret; param-great; mama-My; yatra-where; aham-I; kréòaye-enjoy pastimes; nityam-eternally; vimale-in the pure; yamunä-of the Yamunä; ambhasi-water.

 

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

Sacred Käliya-hrada, where I eternally play in the Yamuna's pure waters, is a great secret of Mine.

 

Text 389

 

taträbhiñekaà kurvéta

aho-rätroñito naraù

takñakasya gåhaà gatvä

mama loke mahéyate

tatra-there; abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; ahaù-day; rätra-and night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; takñakasya-of a carpenter; gåham-to the home;û gatvä-having gone; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

 

Even a person born in a carpenter's house, who fasts for a day and night and bathes there, is glorified in My abode.

 

Text 390-391

 

aträpi mahad äçcaryaà

paçyanti paëòitä naräù

käliya-hrada-pürveëa

kadambo mahato drumaù

çata-çäkho viçäläkñi

puñpaà surabhi-gandhi ca

sa ca dvädaça-mäsäni

manojïaù çubha-çétalaù

puñpäyati viçäläkñi

bhäsvaraàs tu diço daça

atra-here; api-also; mahad-great; äçcaryam-wonder; paçyanti-see; paëòitäù naräù-wise; käliya-hrada-of Käliya-hrada;pürveëa-in the east; kadambaù-kadamba tree; mahataù-great; drumaù-tree; çata-hundred; çäkhaù-branches; viçäla-large; äkñi-eyes; puñpam-flowers; surabhi-gandhi-fragrant; ca-and; sah-it; ca-and; dvädaça-mäsäni-for 12 months; manojïaù'beautiful; çubha-pleasant; çétalaù-cool; puñpäyati-blooms; viçäläkñi-O girl with the beautiful eyes; bhäsvaran-shining; tu-indeed; diçaù-directions; daça-ten.

 

Wise men see a great wonder there. To the east of Käliya-hrada is a great kadamba tree. O girl with beautiful, large eyes, this beautiful, splendidly white, pleasnatly cool, hundred-branched tree is filled with fragrant flowers. O girl with beauitful, large eyes, this tree remains always in bloom through all twelve months of the year, always filling the ten directions with its splendor.

 

Text 392

 

saura-puräne

tataù käliya-térthäkhyaà

térthaà aàho-vinäçanam

anåtyad yatra bhagavän

bälaù käliya-mastake

saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; käliya-tértha-äkhyam-named Käliya-tértha; tértham-holy place» aàhaù-sins; vinäçanam-destroying; anåtyad-danced; yatra-where; bhagavän-the Lord; bälaù'a child; käliya-of Käliya; mastake-on the head.

 

In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

Next is the holy place named Käliya-tértha, which destroys sins. There the Supreme Personality of Godhead as boy danced on Käliya's head.

 

Text 393

 

tatra yas tu kåta-snäno

väsudevaà samarcayet

agaëya-janma-duñpräpaà

kåñëa-säyujyam açnute

tatra-there; yaù-who; tu-indeed; kåta-snänaù-bathes; väsudevam-Lord Väsudeva; samarcayet-worships; agaëya-countless; janma-births; duñpräpam-difficult to attain; kåñëa-säyujyam-Kåñëa-sayuja mukti; açnute-enjoys.

 

A person who bathes there and worships Lord Väsudeva attains kåñëa-säyujya-mukti, which is difficult to attain even after countless births.

 

Text 394

 

atha dvädaçaditya-saàjïasyädi-värähe

sürya-térthe naraù snäto

dåñövädityaà vasundhare

äditya-bhavanaà präpya

kåta-kåtyaù sa modate

atha-now; dvädaçaditya-saàjïasya-Dvädaçäditya-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; sürya-térthe-at Sürya-tértha; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; dåñövä-having seen; ädityam-the sun-god» vasundhare-O earth; äditya-bhavanam-the sun-god's abode; präpya-attaining; kåta-kåtyaù'successful; sah-he; modate-enjoys.

 

Glorification of Dvädaçäditya-tértha

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O earth-goddess, a person who bathes at Sürya-tértha and sees the deity of the sun-god there, goes to the sun-god's abode and becomes happy.

 

Text 395

 

äditye 'hani saìkräntäv

asmin térthe vasundhare

manasäbhépsitaà kämaà

sampräpnoti na saàçayaù

äditye ahani-on Sunday; saìkräntäv-on Sankranti; asmin-in this; térthe-holy place; vasundhare-O earth; manasä-by the heart; abhépsitam-desired; kämam-desire;û sampräpnoti-atains; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

O earth-goddess, a person (who bathes, at this holy place on a Sunday during a sankranti attains his heart's desire. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 396

 

saura-puräne

dvädaçäditya-térthäkhyaà

térthaà tad anu pävakam

tasya darçana-mätreëa

nåëäm aàho vinaçyati

saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; dvädaçäditya-térthäkhyam-named Dvädaçäditya-tértha; tértham-holy place; tad-that; anu-following; pävakam-purifying; tasya-of it; darçana-mätreëa-simply by seeing; nåëäm-of men; aàhaù-sin; vinaçyati-perishes.

 

In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

Next is purifying Dvädaçäditya-tértha. Simply by seeing it, the sins of men become destroyed.

 

Text 397

 

athokta-kramaà yäträyäù kartavyopadeçaù. ädi-värähe

prathamaà madhuvanaà proktaà

dvädaçaà våndikävanam

etäni ye prapaçyanti

na te naraka-bhojinaù

atha-then; ukta-said; kramam-sequence; yäträyäù-of a visit; kartavya-to do; upadeçaù-teaching; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; prathamam-first; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; proktam-said; dvädaçam-twelve; våndikävanam-Våndävana;û etäni-they; ye-who; prapaçyanti-see; na te-they; naraka-hell; bhojinaù-experience.

 

Instruction to Visit the Twelve Forests of Våndävana

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

They who see the twelve forests of Våndävana, which begin with Madhuvana, will not go to hell.

Text 398

 

yathä-krameëa ye yäträà

vanänäà dvädaçasya tu

kariñyanti varärohe

yänti te brähmam älayam

yathä-krameëa-one by one; ye-who; yäträm-visit; vanänäm-of the forests; dvädaçasya-twelve; tu-indeed; kariñyanti-will do; varärohe-O beautiful girl; yänti-attain; te-they; brähmam-spiritual; älayam-abode.

 

O beautiful one, they who visit, one by one, the twelve forests (of Våndävana, go to the spiritual abode.

 

Text 399

 

atha çré-govardhanasya

tatraiva asti govardhanaà näma

kñetraà parama-durlabham

mathurä-paçcime bhäge

adürad yojana-dvayam

atha-now; çré-govardhanasya-of Govarhana Hill; tatra-there; eva-indeed; asti-is; govardhanam-Govardhana; näma-named; kñetram-place; parama-durlabham-very rare; mathurä-paçcime-west of Mathurä; bhäge-O auspicious one; adürad'not far; yojana-dvayam-two yojanas.

 

Glorification of Çré Govardhana

In the same scripture it is said:

Two yojanas (16 miles), which is not very far, west of Mathura' is the very rare place named Govardhana Hill.

 

Text 400

 

anna-küöaà tataù präpya

tasya kuryät pradakñiëam

na tasya punar ävåttir

devi sarvaà bravémi te

anna-küöam-Annaküö-tértha; tataù-then; präpya-attaining; tasya-of that; kuryät-may do; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; na-not; tasya-of him; punar-again; ävåttir-return; devi-O goddess; sarvam-everything; bravémi-I say; te-to you.

A person who circumambulates the place named Annaküöa-tértha does not return to this world. O goddess, I will now tell you everything about it.

 

Text 401

 

snätvä mänasa-gaìgäyäà

dåñövä govardhane harim

annaküöaà parikramya

kià manaù paritapyase

snätvä-having bathed; mänasa-gaìgäyäm-in the manasa-gangä; dåñövä-having seen; govardhane-on Govardhana Hill; harim-Lord Hari; annaküöam-Annaküöa-tértha; parikramya-circumambulating; kim-what?; manaù-heart; paritapyase-suffers.

 

After bathing in the Manasa-gaìgä, seeing the Deity of Lord Hari on Govardhana Hill, and circumambulating Annaküöa-tértha, what heart can remain unhappy?

 

Text 402

 

indrasya varñato 'ty-arthaà

gaväà péòä-karaà jalam

täsäà samrakñaëärthäya

dhåto giri-varo mayä

indrasya-of Indra; varñataù-rains; aty-artham-great; gaväm-of the cows; péòä-karam-tormenting» jalam-water; täsäm-of them; samrakñaëärthäya-to protect; dhåtaù-held; giri-varaù-the âest of hills; mayä-by Me.

 

To protect the cows distressed by Indra's torrential rains, I lifted Govardhana Hill.

 

Text 403

 

anna-küöa iti khyätaù

sarvataù çakra-püjitaù

soma-väre tö amävasyäà

präpya govardhanaà naraù

dattvä piëòän pitåbhyaç ca

räjasüya-phalaà labhet

anna-küöa iti khyätaùknown as Annaküöa-tértha; sarvataù-completely; çakra-by Indra; püjitaù-worshiped; soma-väre-on Sunday; tu-indeed; amävasyäm-the new-moon; präpya-attaining; govardhanam-Go9vardhana; naraù-a person; dattvä-giving; piëòän-piëòa; pitåbhyaù-to the pitäs; ca-and; räjasüya-phalam-result of a räjasüya-yajna; labhet-attains.

 

The place where Indra worshiped Lord Kåñëa is famous as Annaküöa-tértha. A person who, on a Sunday that is also a new-moon day, goes to Govardhana Hill and offers piëòa to his ancestors, attains the result of offering a räjasüya-yajïa.

 

Text 404

 

skände mathurä-khaëòe

govardhanaç ca bhagavän

yatra govardhano dhåtaù

rakñitä yädaväù sarva

indra-våñöi-niväraëät

skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; govardhanaù-Govardhana; ca-and; bhagavän'the Lord; yatra-where; govardhanaù-Govardhana; dhåtaù-held; rakñitä-protected; yädaväù-the Yadus; sarve-all; indra-of Indra; våñöi-the rain; niväraëät-because of stopping.

 

In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

Govardhana Hill is an incarnation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. When the Lord lifted the hill, all the people of Vraja were saved from Indra's rains.

 

Text 405

 

aho govardhano viñëur

yatra tiñöhati sarvadä

yatra brahmä çivo lakñmér

vasaty eva na saàçayaù

ahaù-Oh; govardhanaù-Govardhana; viñëur-Lord Viñëu; yatra-where; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-always; yatra-where; brahmä-Brahmä; çivaù-Çiva; lakñmér-Lakñmé; vasati-reside; eva-certainly; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

Oh, Lord Viñëu stays eternally on Govardhana Hill. Brahmä, Çiva, and Lakñmé also reside there. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 406

 

värähe

asti govardhanaà näma

guhyaà kñetraà paraà mama

adüräd añöa-kroçat tu

mathuräyäç ca paçcime

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; asti-is; govardhanam- näma-named Govardhana; guhyam-secret; kñetram-place; param-transcendental; mama-My; adüräd-not far; añöa-kroçat-8 kroças; tu-indeed; mathuräyäù-from Mathurä; ca-and; paçcime-west.

 

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

Eight kroças (16 miles), not very far, west of Mathura', is My very confidential place named Govardhana.

 

Text 407

 

taträpi mahad äçcaryaà

yat paçyanti su-cetasaù

tasmin samvartate bhümir

sarva-bhägavata-priyam

tatra-there; api-also; mahad-great; äçcaryam-a wonder; yat-which; paçyanti-see; su-cetasaù'wise; tasmin-there; samvartate-is; bhümir-place; sarva-bhägavata-priyam-dear to all the devotees.

 

The wise see a great wonder there. In that place is something dear to all the devotees.

 

Text 408

 

catur-viàçati-dvädaçyaà

tasmin çikhara-parvate

sthülän paçyanti dépän vai

dyotayanto diço daça

catur-viàçati-dvädaçyam-on Caturvimsati-dvädaçé; tasmin-there; çikhara-parvate-on the hill; sthülän-great; paçyanti-see; dépän-lamps; vai-indeed; dyotayantaù-shining; diçaù-directions; daça-ten.

 

On Caturviàçati-dvädaçé the devotees see on Govardhana Hill many great lamps shining in the ten directions.

 

Text 409

 

yaç ca tän paçyate dépän

mama karma-paräyaëaù

labhate paramäà siddhim

evam etän na saàçayaù

yaù-who; ca-and; tän-them; paçyate-sees; dépän-lamps; mama-My; karma-paräyaëaù'devoted to the service; labhate-attains; paramäm-supreme; siddhim-perfection; evam-in this way;û etän-them; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

They who, devoted to My service, see these lamps. attain the supreme perfection. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 410

 

bhädre pärçva-parivartinyäm ekädaçyäà govardhana-yäträ. ädi-värähe

mäsi bhädra-pade yä tu

çuklä caikädaçé çubhä

govardhane sopaväsaù

kuryät tasya pradakñiëam

govardhanaà parikraman

dåñövä devaà harià prabhum

räjasüyaçvamedhäbhyäà

phalam präpnoty asaàçayaù

bhädre-in Bhadra; pärçva-parivartinyäm ekädaçyäm-on the çukla-ekädaçé; govardhana-to Govardhana; yäträ-a visit; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mäsi bhädra-pade-in the month of Bhadra; yä-which; tu-indeed; çuklä-çukla; ca-and; ekädaçé-ekädaçé; çubhä-auspicious; govardhane-on Govardhana Hill; sopaväsaù-with fasting; kuryät-does; tasya-of it; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; govardhanam-Govardhana; parikraman-circumambulating; dåñövä-having seen; devam- harim- prabhum-Lord Hari; räjasüya-rajasuya; açvamedhäbhyäm-an asvamedha sacrifices; phalam-result; präpnoti-attains; asaàçayaù-without doubt.

 

Visiting Govardhana Hill During Ekädaçé in the Month of Bhädra (August-September)

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

On the auspicious çukla-ekädaçé in the month of Bhädra (August-September, one should fast and circumambulate Govardhana Hill. After circumambulating Govardhana Hill and seeing the Deity of Lord Hari there, one attains the result of having performed an räjasüya-yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 412

 

çré-daçame

hantäyam adrir abalä hari-däsa-varyo

yad räma-kåçëa-caraëa-sparaça-pramodaù

mänaà tanoti saha-go-gaëayos tayor yat

pänéya-süyavasa-kandara-kanda-mülaiù

hanta-oh» ayam-this» adrir-hill» abaläù-O friends» hari-däsa-varyaù-the best among the servants of the Lord; yat-because; räma-kåçëa-caraëa-of the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa and Balaräma» sparaça-by the touch» pramodaù-jubilant» mänam-respects» tanoti-ogfers» saha-with» go-gaëayoù-cows, calves, and cowherd boys» tayoù-to Them (Sri Kåñëa and Balarama)» yat-because» pänéya-drinking water» süyavasa-very soft grass» kandara-caves» kanda-mülaiù-and by roots.

 

In the Tenth Canto (10.21.18, of Srimad-Bhagavatam it is said:

Of all the devotees this Govardhana Hill is the best! O my friends, this hill supplies Kåñëa and Balaräma, as well as Their calves, cows, and cowherd friends, with all kinds of necessities: water for drinking, very soft grass, caves, fruits, flowers, and vegetables. In this way the hill offers respect to the Lord. Being touched by the lotus feet of Kåñëa and Balaräma, Govardhana Hill appears very jubilant.*

 

Text 413

 

tatrastha-brahma-kuëòasya mathurä-khaëòe

tatra snätvä brahma-kuëòe

brahmaëä toñito hariù

indrädi-loka-pälänäà

jätäni ca saräàsi hi

tatra-there; stha-situated; brahma-kuëòasya-Brahma-kuëòa; mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-khaëòa;û tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; brahma-kuëòe-in Brahma-kuëòa; brahmaëä-by Brahmä; toñitaù-pleased; hariù-Lord Hari; indra-ädi-loka-pälänäm-of Indra and the other demigod planetary rulers; jätäni'born; ca-and; saräàsi-lakes; hi-indeed.

 

Glorification of Brahma-kuëòa In That Place

In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

After bathing in Brahma-kuëòa, Brahmä satisfied Lord Hari. Indra and other planetary rulers created other lakes nearby.

 

Text 414

 

ädi-värähe

hradaà tatra mahä-bhäge

druma-gulma-latävåtam

catväri tatra térthäni

puëyäni ca çubhäni ca

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; hradam-a lake; tatra-there; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; druma-gulma-latävåtam-surrounded by trees and vines; catväri-fourteen; tatra-there; térthäni puëyäni-holy places; ca-and; çubhäni-auspicious; ca-and.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

O auspicious one, that lake is surrounded by groves of trees and vines and by fourteen auspicious holy places.

 

Text 415

 

aidraà pürvena pärçvena

yama-térthaà tu dakñiëe

väruëaà pascime térthaà

kauveraà cottareëa tu

tatra madhye sthitaç cähaà

kréòayiñye yad icchayä

aidram-Indra-tértha; pürvena-in the east; pärçvena-side; yama-tértham-Yama-tértha; tu-indeed; dakñiëe-in the south; väruëam-Varuëa-tértha; pascime-in the west; tértham- kauveram-Kuvera-tértha; ca-and; uttareëa-in the north; tu-indeed; tatra-there; madhye-in the middle; sthitaù-situated; ca-and; aham-I; kréòayiñye-will enjoy pastimes; yad-which; icchayä-as I wish.

 

On the eastern side is Indra-tértha. On the south is Yama-tértha. On the west is Varuëa-tértha. On the north is Kuvera-tértha. In these places I will enjoy pastimes as I wish.

 

Text 416

 

çré-govinda-kuëòasya mathurä-khaëòe

yaträbhiñikto bhagavän

maghonä yadu-vairiëä

govinda-kuëòaà taj-jätaà

snäna-mätreëa mokña-dam

çré-govinda-kuëòasya-Govinda-kuëòa; mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathurä-khaëòa; yatra-where; abhiñiktaù-bathed; bhagavän-the Lord; maghonä-by Indra; yadu-of the Yadus; vairiëä-the enemy; govinda-kuëòam-Govinda-kuëòa; taê-jätam-born from that; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; mokña-dam-grants liberation.

 

Glorification of Çré Govinda-kuëòa

In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

The Supreme Personality of Godhead was bathed by Indra, who had become the enemy of Vraja. From that bathing Govinda-kuëòa, was created. Govinda-kuëòa grants liberation to those who do nothing more than bathe in it.

 

Text 417

 

ädi-värähe

anna-küöasya sännidhye

térthaà çakra-vinirmitam

tasmin snäne tarpaëe ca

çata-kratu-phalaà labhet

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anna-küöasya-Annaküt„a; sännidhye-near; tértham-a holy place; çakra-by Indra; vinirmitam-made; tasmin-there; snäne-in âathing; tarpaëe-pleasing; ca-and; çata-kratu-phalam-result of a hundred yajnas; labhet-attains.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Near Annaküöa-tértha is the holy place (Govinda-kuëòa, that Indra made. A person who bathes there and offers tarpaëa attains the result of performing a hundred yajïas.

 

Text 418

 

çré-rädhä-kuëòadikasyädi-värähe

ariñöa-rädhä-kuëòäbhyäà

snänät phalam aväpyate

räjasüyäçvamedhäbhyäà

nätra käryä vicäraëä

çré-rädhä-kuëòa-Rädha'-kuëòa; ädikasya-beginning with; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; ariñöa-rädhä-kuëòäbhyäm-Rädha'-kuëòa and Çyäma-kuëòa; snänät-from bathing; phalam-result; aväpyate-is attained; räjasüya-açvamedhäbhyäm-of rajasuya and asvamedha yajnas; na-not; atra-here; käryä-should be done; vicäraëä-doubt.

 

Glorification of Rädhä-kuëòa and Other Places

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

By bathing in Rädhä-kuëòa and Syama-kuëòa, one attains the result of having performed a räjasüya-yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 419

 

mathurä-khaëòe

dépotsave kärttike ca

rädhä-kuëòe yudhiñöhira

dåçyate sakalaà viçvaà

bhåtyair viñëu-paräyaëaiù

mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-khaëòa; dépotsave-in the dépotsava festival; kärttike-during Kärttika; ca-and; rädhä-kuëòe-at Rädha'-kuëòa; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira; dåçyate-is seen; sakalam-all; viçvam-the universe; bhåtyair-by servants; viñëu-to Lord Viñëu; paräyaëaiù-devoted.

 

In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

O Yudhiñöhira, during the dépotsava festival Lord Viñëu's devoted servants at Rädhä-kuëòa can see the entire universe.

 

Text 420

 

pädme kärttika-mähätmye

govardhane girau ramye

rädhä-kuëòaà priyaà hareù

kärttike bahuläñöamyäà

tatra snätvä hareù priyaù

pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya; govardhane-on Govardhana; girau-Hill; ramye'charming; rädhä-kuëòam-Rädhä-kuëòa; priyam-dear; hareù-to Hari; kärttike-in Kärttika; bahuläñöamyäm-Bahulastami; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; hareù'to Lord Hari; priyaù-dear.

 

In the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:

Rädhä-kuëòa, by beautiful Govardhana Hill, is dear to Lord Hari. A person who bathes there on the Bahuläñöamé day of the month of Kärttika is also dear to Lord Hari.

 

Text 421

 

naro bhakto bhaved vipräs

tat-sthitasya pratoñaëam

yathä rädhä priyä viñëos

tasyäù kuëòaà priyaà tathä

naraù-a person; bhaktaù-a devotee; bhaved-becomes; vipraùbrähmaëa; tat-sthitasya-staying there; pratoñaëam-satisfaction; yathä-as; rädhä-Rädhä; priyä-is dear; viñëoùto Viñëu; tasyäù-Her; kuëòam-lake; priyam-dear; tathä-in the same way.

 

O brähmaëas, a person who satisfies the residents of Rädhä-kuëòa becomes a great devotee. As S"rématé Rädhä is dear to Lord Viñëu, so Her lake (Rädhä-kuëòa, is also dear to Him.

 

Text 422

 

sarva-gopéñu saivaikä

viñëor atyanta-vallabhä

tat-kuëòe kärttikäñöamyäà

tatra snätvä hareù priyaù

sarva-among all; gopéñu-the gopés; sä-She; eva-indeed; ekä-alone; viñëor-to Lord Viñëu; atyanta-most; vallabhä-dear; tat-kuëòe-at Her lake; kärttika-of Kärttika; añöamyäm-on the astami day; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; hareù-of Lord Hari;û priyaù-dear.

 

Among all the gopés, She is most dear to Lord Viñëu. A person who, on the añöamé day of the month of Kärttika, bathes in Her lake, becomes dear to Lord Hari.

 

Text 423

 

natvä stutvä ca sampüjyo

deva-deva-janärdanaù

prabodhinyäà yathä-as; prétas

tathä prétas tato bhavet

natvä-offering obeisances; stutvä-offering prayers; ca-and; sampüjyaù-to be worshiped; deva-deva-the master of the demigods; janärdanaù-Janärdana; prabodhinyäm-on Prabodhiné; yathä-as; prétaùpleased; tathä-so; prétaù-pleased; tataù-then; bhavet-is.

 

As Lord Janärdana, the master of the demigods, is pleased by obeisances, prayers and worship during the Prabodhiné day, so He is also pleased when these are done at Rädhä-kuëòa.

 

Text 424

 

athäkrüra-térthasya saura-puräëe

ananta-vasati-çreñöhaà

sarva-päpa-vinäçanam

akrüra-tértham aty-artham

asti priyataraà hareù

atha-now; akrüra-térthasya-of Akrüra-tértha; saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; ananta-limitless; vasati-of abodes; çreñöham-the best; sarva-päpa-vinäçanam-destroying all sins; akrüra-tértham-Akrüra-tértha; aty-artham asti priyataram-is very dear; hareù-to Lord Hari.

 

Glorification of Akrüra-tértha

In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

The best of the Lord's numberless abodes and the destroyer of all sins, Akrüra-tértha is very dear to Lord Hari.

 

Text 425

 

pürëimäyäà tu yaù snäyät

tatra tértha-vare naraù

sa mukta eva saàsärät

kärttikyäà tu viçeñataù

pürëimäyäm-on the full-moon day; tu-indeed; yaù-who; snäyät-bathes; tatra-there; tértha-vare-at the best of holy places; naraù-a person; sah-he; muktah-liberated; eva-indeed; saàsärät-from birth and death; kärttikyäm-during Kärttika; tu-indeed; viçeñataù-specifically.

 

A person who, on the full-moon day of the month of Kärttika, bathes at that very holy place, becomes freed from the cycle of repeated birth and death.

 

Text 426

 

ädi-värähe

tértha-rajaà hi cäkrüraà

guhyänäà guhyam uttamam

tat-phalaà samaväpnoti

sarva-térthävagähanät

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tértha-rajam-the king of holy places; hi-indeed; ca-and; akrüram-Akrüra; guhyänäm-of secrets; guhyam-secret; uttamam-supreme; tat-phalam-result; samaväpnoti-atains; sarva-tértha-in all holy places; avagähanät-from bathing.

 

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Akrüra-tértha is the king of holy places, the most confidential of confidential abodes. There one attains the result of bathing in all other holy places.

Text 427

 

akrüre ca punaù snätvä

rähu-graste diväkare

räjasüyaçvamedhäbhyäà

phalaà präpnoti niçcitam

akrüre-at Akrüra-tértha; ca-and; punaù-again; snätvä-having bathed; rähu-graste diväkare-on a solar eclipse; räjasüya-açvamedhäbhyäm-of a rajasuya and asvamedha sacrifice; phalam-result; präpnoti-attains; niçcitam-certainly.

 

A person who, during a solar eclipse, bathes in Akrüra-tértha, certainly attains the result of performing a räjasüya-yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa.

 

Text 428

 

atha bhäëòägärasya värähe

bhäëòägäram iti khyätaà

guhyam ati tato mama

labhante manujä bhümi

siddhià tatra na saàçayaù

atha-now; bhäëòägärasya-of Bhandagara-tértha; värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; bhäëòägäram-Bhandagara-tértha; iti-thus; khyätam-celebrated; guhyam-confidential; ati-very; tataù-then; mama-My; labhante-attain; manujäh-people; bhümi-on the earth; siddhim-perfection» tatra-there; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

Glorification of Bhäëòägära-tértha

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

O earth-goddess, the place known as Bhäëòägära-tértha is My confidential abode. In Bhäëòägära-tértha people attain perfection. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 429-431

 

tatra kuëòaà mahä-bhäge

druma-gulma-latävåtam

tatra snänaà prakurvéta

aho-rätroñito naraù

lokaà vaidyädharaà gatvä

modate kåta-niçcayaù

taträçcaryaà pravakñyämi

bhümi guhyaà paraà mama

catur-viàçati-dvädaçyaà mama bhakti-vayavsthitäù

ardha-rätreñu çåëvanti

gétaà karëa-sukhävaham

tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; druma-gulma-latävåtam-surrounded by trees and vines; tatra-there; snänam-bath; prakurvéta-does; ahaù-day; rätra-and night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; lokam- vaidyädharam-Vidyadharaloka; gatvä-having gone; modate-enjoys; kåta-niçcayaù-determined; tatra-there; äçcaryam-a wonder; pravakñyämi-I will describe; bhümi-on the earth; guhyam-secret; param-great; mama-My; catur-viàçati-dvädaçyam-on caturvimsati-dvädaçé; mama-My; bhakti-vayavsthitäù-situated in devotion; ardha-half; rätreñu-in nights; çåëvanti-hear; gétam-sing; karëa-to the ears; sukha-happiness; avaham-carrying.

 

O auspicious one, that lake is surrounded by groves of trees and vines. A person who, fasting for a day and a night, bathes there, goes to Vidyädharaloka, where enjoys great happiness. O earth-goddess, I shall now tell you a wonderful secret. At this place, on caturviàçati-dvädaçé, my devotees stay awake, in the middle of the night hearing songs about Me that bring pleasure to the ears.

 

Text 432

 

atha nandéçvarasya çré-daçame

puëyä bata vraja-bhuvo yad ayaà nå-liìgo

güòhaù puräëa-puruño vana-citra-mälyaù

gäù pälayan saha-balaù kvaëayaàç ca veëuà

vikréòayäïcati giritra-ramärcitäìghriù

atha-now; nandéçvarasya-of Nandéçvara; çré-daçame-in the Tenth Canto; puëyä-sacred; bata-indeed; vraja-bhuvaù-of the land of Vraja; yad-whéh; ayam-this; nr„-liìgaù-in a human form; güòhaù-concealed; puräëa-puruñaù-the ancient Supreme Person; vana-citra-mälyaù-wearing wonderful garlands of forest-flowers; gäù-the cows; pälayan-protecting; saha-balaù-with Balaräma; kvaëayan-playing; ca-and; veëum-the flute; vikréòayä-playfully; aïcati'tilting; giritra-by Çiva; ramä-and Lakñmé; arcita-worshiped; aìghriù-feet.

 

Glorification of Nandéçvara-tértha

In the Tenth Canto (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.44.13, it is said:

Dear friends, just imagine how fortunate the land of Våndävana is where the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself is present, always decorated with flower garlands and engaged in tending cows along with His brother, Lord Balaräma. He is always accompanied by His cowherd boy friends, and He plays His transcendental flute. The residents of Våndävana are fortunate to be able to constantly see the lotus feet of Kåñëa and Balaräma, which are worshiped by great demigods like Lord Çiva and Brahmä and the goddess of fortune.*

 

Text 433

 

tathä ca paöhanti

pävane sarasi snätvä

kåñëaà nandéçvare girau

dåñövä nandaà yaçodäà ca

sarväbhéñöam aväpnuyät

tathä-so; ca-and; paöhanti-read; pävane sarasi-in Pävana-sarovara; snätvä-having bathed; kåñëam-Kåñëa; nandéçvare-in Nandéçvara; girau-hill; dåñövä-having seen; nandam-Nanda;

yaçodäm-Yaçoda; ca-and; sarva-all; abhéñöam-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.

 

In the Vedé literatures it is said:

A person who bathes in Pävana-sarovara on Nandéçvara Hill and sees the Deities of Nanda and Yaçodä, attains all his desires.

 

Text 434

 

çakaöärohanasyädi-värähe

çakaöärohanaà näma

tasmin kñetre paraà mama

mathurä-paçcime bhäge

adüräd ardha-yojane

çakaöärohanasya-of Sakaöärohana-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; çakaöärohanam- näma-named Çakaöärohana-tértha; tasmin-in this; kñetre-place; param-transcendental; mama-My; mathurä-paçcime-to the west of Mathurä; bhäge-O auspicious one; adüräd-not far; ardha-yojane-half a yojana.

 

Glorification of Çakaöärohana-tértha

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

Half a yojana (4 miles), not far, west of Mathura' is My holy place named Çakaöärohana-tértha.

Text 435

 

anekäni sahasräëi

bhramaräëäà vasanti vai

taträbhiñekaà kurvéta

eka-rätroñito naraù

sa tu vaidyädharaà lokaà

gatvä tu ramate sukham

anekäni-many; sahasräëi-thousands; bhramaräëäm-of bees; vasanti-live; vai-indeed; tatra-there; abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; eka-rätra-for one night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; sah-he; tu-indeed» vaidyädharam- lokam-to Vidyadharaloka; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; ramate-enjoys; sukham-happiness.

 

Many thousands of bees reside there. A person who, fasting for one night, bathes there, goes to Vidyädharaloka, where he enjoys great happiness.

 

Text 436

 

taträpi mahad äçcaryaà

paçyanti pathi saàsthitäù

sarva-puñpa-varaà kuëòaà

mägha-mäse tu dvädaçé

tatra-there; api-also; mahad-a great; äçcaryam-wonder; paçyanti-see; pathi-on the pathway; saàsthitäù-situated; sarva-puñpa-varam-filled with all flowers; kuëòam-lake; mägha-mäse-in the month of Mägha; tu-indeed; dvädaçé-on the dvädaçé.

 

Travelers on the pathways there see a great wonder. On the dvädaçé of the month of Mägha (January-February, they see the lake there filled with every kind of flower.

 

Text 437

 

atha grahaëa-snänädy-artham keñucit tértheñu kurukñetratväti-deçaù. ädi-värähe

govardhanaà tathäkrüraà

dve koöé dakñiëottare

praskandanaà ca bhäëòéraà

kurukñetra-samäni sat

atha-now; grahaëa-snänädy-artham-for bathing; keñucit'certain; tértheñu-holy places; kurukñetratväti-deçaù-are like Kurukñetra; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; govardhanam-Govardhana; tathä-then; akrüram-Akrüra-tértha; dve-two; koöé'sides; dakñiëa-south; uttare-north; praskandanam-Praskandana-tértha; ca-and; bhäëòéram-Bhandira; kurukñetra-Kurukñetra; samäni-equal; sat-being.

 

Some of These Holy Bathing-places Are Like Kurukñetra

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

With Govardhana and Akrüra-tértha on the south and north, and Praskandana-tértha and Bhäëòéra on the other sides, the area is like Kurukñetra.

 

Text 438

 

atha yathärtha-kathanaà tatraiva

asi-kuëòaà ca vaikuëöhaà

koöi-térthottamaà tadä

avimuktaà soma-térthaà

saàyamanaà tindukaà tathä

cakra-térthaà tathäkrüraà

dvädaçäditya-saàjïakam

ete puëyäù paviträç ca

mahä-pätaka-näçanäù

atha-now; yathärtha-appropriate; kathanam-description; tatra-there; eva-indeed; asi-kuëòam-Asi-kuëòa; ca-and; vaikuëöham-Vaikuëöha-tértha; koöi-tértha-Koöi-tértha; uttamam-after; tadä-then; avimuktam-Avimukta-tértha; soma-tértham-Soma-tértha; saàyamanam-Samyamana-tértha; tindukam-Tinduka-tértha; tathä-then; cakra-tértham-Cakra-tértha; tathä-then; akrüram-Akrüra-tértha; dvädaçäditya-saàjïakam'the place named Dvädaçäditya-tértha; ete-these; puëyäù-sacred; paviträù-pure; ca-and; mahä-great; pätaka-sins; näçanäù-destroying.

 

These Places Are Like Kurukñetra

In the same scripture it is said:

The places are: Asi-kuëòa, Vaikuëöha-tértha, Koöi-tértha, Avimukta-tértha, Soma-tértha, Samyamana-tértha, Tinduka-tértha, Cakra-tértha, Akrüra-tértha, and Dvädaçäditya-tértha. These purifying sacred places destroy the greatest sins.

 

Text 439

 

kurukñeträ chata-guëä

mathuräyäà na saàçayaù

kurukñeträc-than Kurukñetra; chata-guëä-a hundred times» mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

 

These places in Mathura' are a hundred times more sacred than Kurukñetra. Of this there is no doubt.

 

 

Text 440

 

ye paöhanti mahä-bhäge

çåëvanti ca samähitäù

mathuräyäç ca mähätmyaà

te yänti paramäà gatim

ye-who; paöhanti-who read; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; çåëvanti-hear; ca-and; samähitäù-assembled; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; ca-and; mähätmyam-glorification;- te-they; yänti-attain; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.

 

O fortunate one, they who read or hear of the glories of Mathura' go to the supreme destination.

 

Text 441

 

te kuläni tärayanti

dve çate pakñayor dvayoù

mähätmya-çravaëäd eva

nätra käryä vicäraëä

te-they; kuläni-relatives; tärayanti-liberate; dve çate-two hundred; pakñayor dvayoù'on both sides; mähätmya-of the glories; çravaëäd-by hearing; eva-indeed; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicäraëä-doubt.

 

By hearing the glories of Mathurä, the listeners liberate two hundred relatives on both sides of their families. Of this there is no doubt.

 

Text 442 and 443

 

mathurä-mahä-térthäni

viçräntir asi-kuëòaà ca

vaikuëöho dhruva eva ca

kåñëa-gaìgä cakra-térthaà

sarasvatyäç ca saìgamaù

catuù-sämudrikaù küpo

gokarëäkhya-çivas tathä

govardhano nanda-gåhaà

vatsa-kréòanakas tathä

vanäni dvädaça tathä mahä-térthäni mäthure

mathurä-of Mathurä; mahä-the great; térthäni-holy places; viçräntir-Viçränti-tértha; asi-kuëòam-Asi-kuëòa; ca-and; vaikuëöhaù-Vaikuëöha-tértha; dhruva-Dhruva-tértha; eva-certainly; ca-and; kåñëa-gaìgä-the Kåñëa-gaìgä; cakra-tértham-Cakra-tértha; sarasvatyäù-the Sarasvaté; ca-and; saìgamaù-saìgama» catuù-sämudrikaù küpaù-Catuh-samudrika-kupa; gokarëäkhya-çivaù-Gokarëaküpa; tathä-then; govardhanaù-Govardhana; nanda-gåham-Nanda's home; vatsakréòanakaù-Vatsakridanaka; tathä-then; vanäni-forests; dvädaça-twelve; tathä'then; mahä-térthäni-great holy places; mäthure-in Mathurä.

 

The Great Holy Places of Mathurä

Viçränti-tértha, Asi-kuëòa, Vaikuëöha-tértha, Dhruva-tértha, Kåñëa-gaìgä, Cakra-tértha, Sarasvaté-saìgama, Catuù-sämudrika-küpa, Gokarëa-çiva, Govardhana Hill, Nanda's home, Vatsa-kréòana-tértha, and the twelve forests, are the great holy places in Mathurä.

 

Text 444

 

atha mäthure deva-väräù

näräyaëänya-paryäyaù

keçavo madhya-saàsthitaù

svayambhüù padmanäbhaç ca

dérgha-viñëur gataçramaù

govindo hari-varähäv

iti mathurä-devatäù

atha-now; mäthure-in Mathurä; deva-väräù-the great Deities; näräyaëänya-paryäyaù-beginning with Lord Nära'yaëa; keçavaù-Keçava; madhya-saàsthitaù-in the middle; svayambhüù-Svayambhü; padmanäbhaù-Padmanäbha; ca-and; dérgha-viñëur-Dérgha-Viñëu; gataçramaù-Lord Gataçrama; govindaù-Govinda; hari+hari; varähau-and Varäha; iti-thus; mathurä-in Mathurä; devatäù-the Deities.

 

The Deities of Mathurä

Näräyaëa, Keçava, Svayambhü, Padmanäbha, Dérgha-Viñëu, Gataçrama, Govinda, Hari, and Varäha, are the Deities of Mathurä.

 

Text 445

 

mathuräyäs tu mähätmyaà

sa-vanäyä mahädbhutam

gopalottara-täpanyäm anyad apy asti kértanam

mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; tu-indeed; mähätmyam-glorification;- sa-vanäyäh-with its forests; mahä-adbhutam-great wonder; gopala-uttara-täpanyäm-in Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad, Chapter Two; anyad-another; api-also; asti-is; kértanam-glorification.

 

This is the wonderful glorification of Mathura' and its forests. Further glorification is in the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad, Chapter Two.

 

Text 446

 

térthäny uktäni bhüréëi

puräneñö atra mäthure

khyätäny evädhunä teñäà

likhitänéha känicit

térthäni-holy places; uktäni-described; bhüréëi-many; puräneñu-in the Puräëa; atra-here; mäthure'in Mathurä; khyätäni-famous; eva-indeed; adhunä-now; teñäm-of them; likhitäni-have been written; iha-here; känicit-some.

 

Many holy places in Mathurä are described in the Puräëas. Some of the more famous of them have been written here.

Çré Padyävalé